Di-soric ID-06 industrial imager User’s Manual

ID-06 Industrial Imager

User’s Manual

ID-06 User’s Manual

Copyright and Disclaimer

Copyright ©2010

ISO 9001 Certified

Issued by TüV USA

All rights reserved. The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and/or service di-soric manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of di-soric.

Throughout this manual, trademarked names might be used. Rather than place a trademark (™) symbol at every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement.

Disclaimer

The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice.

Latest Manual Version

For the latest version of this manual, see the Download Center on our web site at:

www.di-soric.com

.

Technical Support

For technical support, e-mail:

[email protected]

.

Warranty and Terms of Sale

For Standard Warranty information contact:

di-soric GmbH & Co. KG

Steinbeisstraße 6

DE-73660 Urbach

Fon: +49 (0) 71 81 / 98 79 - 0

Fax: +49 (0) 71 81 / 98 79 - 179 [email protected]

www.di-soric.com

ii

ID-06 Industrial Imager User’s Manual

Introduction

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Quick Start

Step 1 Check Hardware...........................................................................1-2

Step 2 Connect the System .....................................................................1-4

Step 3 Position the Imager ......................................................................1-6

Step 4 Install di-soric ID...........................................................................1-7

Step 5 Select Model.................................................................................1-8

Step 6 Connect ......................................................................................1-10

Step 7 Locate Symbol............................................................................1-12

Step 8 Calibrate .....................................................................................1-14

Step 9 Test Read Rate ..........................................................................1-15

Step 10 Configure the Imager................................................................1-16

Step 11 Save Changes..........................................................................1-17

Chapter 2 Using di-soric ID

EZ Mode ..................................................................................................2-2

App Mode ................................................................................................2-3

Menu Toolbar...........................................................................................2-4

Navigating in di-soric ID........................................................................ 2-15

Send/Receive Options .......................................................................... 2-16

Chapter 3 Hardware Integration

Connectors ..............................................................................................3-2

Cordsets ..................................................................................................3-3

ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES Connectors and Pinouts......................................3-4

Power and Trigger Switching...................................................................3-9

Port Routing...........................................................................................3-10

Application Examples ............................................................................3-11

Chapter 4 Setup

Video........................................................................................................4-2

Evaluation ............................................................................................. 4-18

Calibration..............................................................................................4-21

Window of Interest .................................................................................4-22

Configuration Database .........................................................................4-24

Ordered Output......................................................................................4-33

Output Format........................................................................................4-37

Dynamic Setup ......................................................................................4-41

Chapter 5 Parameters

Communication........................................................................................5-2

Read Cycle ............................................................................................5-41

Symbologies ..........................................................................................5-61

I/O Parameters ......................................................................................5-97

Symbol Quality.....................................................................................5-159

Matchcode ...........................................................................................5-166


iii

Table of Contents

Diagnostics .......................................................................................... 5-175

Chapter 6 Terminal

Terminal Window..................................................................................... 6-2

Find.......................................................................................................... 6-3

Send ........................................................................................................ 6-4

Macros..................................................................................................... 6-5

Terminal Window Menus ......................................................................... 6-6

Chapter 7 Utilities

Serial Utility Commands .......................................................................... 7-2

Read Rate ............................................................................................... 7-4

Counters .................................................................................................. 7-6

Device Control ......................................................................................... 7-9

Differences from Default........................................................................ 7-10

Master Database ................................................................................... 7-11

Firmware................................................................................................ 7-17

Bar Code Configuration Mode ............................................................... 7-21

Calibration ............................................................................................. 7-22

Default/Reset/Save................................................................................ 7-23

Imager Status ........................................................................................ 7-25

Learn Operations................................................................................... 7-27

Reboot System ...................................................................................... 7-28

Static Validation..................................................................................... 7-29

Targeting ............................................................................................... 7-31

Y-Modem Transfer Options ................................................................... 7-32

Appendices

Appendix A General Specifications .........................................................A-2

Appendix B Electrical Specifications .....................................................A-11

Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations ....................................A-20

Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts..............................................A-22

Appendix E Serial Commands...............................................................A-23

Appendix F Protocol Commands...........................................................A-78

Appendix G ASCII Table .......................................................................A-87

Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP .............................................A-88

Appendix I Using EtherNet/IP................................................................A-91

Appendix J Allen-Bradley PLC Setup ..................................................A-100

Appendix K Interface Standards..........................................................A-121

Appendix L Glossary of Terms ............................................................A-122

iv


Introduction

About the ID-06 Industrial Imager

The key features of the ID-06 Industrial Imager are:

• Standard and C-Mount versions available

• Fully integrated liquid lens technology, allowing infinite focus flexibility

• High-resolution modular optical zoom system

• Best-in-class X-Mode™ algorithms

• Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP

• A green flash (visible from all angles) to signal a successful read

• LED array for performance, communication, and I/O user feedback

• EZ Button for setup and testing

• Compact size for easy integration into a wide variety of applications

• IP65/67 enclosure

Imager Communication

There are three ways to configure and test the ID-06:

• di-soric’s Windows-based di-soric ID Software (Setup Program), which offers point-and-click ease of use and visual rdi-soric IDonses to user adjustments.

• Serial commands, such as

<K100,1>

, that can be sent from di-soric ID’s Terminal or another terminal program.

• The EZ Button on the top of the imager.


v

Warning and Caution Summary

Warning and Caution Summary

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna;

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver;

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected;

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For connection to a UL-listed direct plug-in power unit marked Class II and rated 10 to 28

VDC at 5 watts or greater.

U.S. models must use a similarly rated Class I or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standards for safety IEC 60950-1 Ed. 2 (2005) and IEC 60825-1 Ed. 2 (2007).

European models must use a similarly rated Class I or Class II power supply that is certified to comply with standard for safety EN 60950-1 (2006) with Am. 11 (2009).

Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous laser or LED light radiation exposure.

There are no user-serviceable parts in the imager. Opening the imager voids the di-soric Systems, Inc. warranty.

Warning Label Placement

This warning label is located on the ID-06 Industrial Imager:

vi


Introduction

Statement of Agency Compliance

The ID-06 has been tested for compliance with FCC (Federal Communications Commission) regulations and has been found to conform to all applicable FCC Rules and Regulations.

To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this device must not be co-located or operate in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The ID-06 has been tested for compliance with CE (Conformité Européenne) standards and guidelines, and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards, specifically the following requirements:

General Immunity for Light Industry: EN 55024:1998 ITE Immunity Standard

Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE Equipment: EN 55022:98 ITE Disturbances

The ID-06 has been tested by an independent electromagnetic compatibility laboratory in accordance with the applicable specifications and instructions.


vii

Statement of RoHS Compliance

Statement of RoHS Compliance

All di-soric ID readers are RoHS-Compliant.

These products meet all the requirements of the European Parliament and the Council of the

European Union for RoHS compliance. In accordance with the latest requirements, our

RoHS-compliant products and packaging do not contain intentionally added Deca-BDE,

Perfluorooctanes (PFOS) or Perfluorooctanoic Acid (PFOA) compounds above the maximum trace levels. To view the documents stating these requirements, please visit: http://eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/LexUriServ.do?uri=CELEX:32002L0095:EN:HTML and http://eur-lex.europa.eu/LexUriServ/LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2006:372:0032:0034:EN:PDF

Please contact your sales manager for a complete list of di-soric’s RoHS-Compliant products.

This declaration is based upon information obtained from sources which di-soric believes to be reliable, and from random sample testing; however, the information is provided without any representation of warranty, expressed or implied, regarding accuracy or correctness. di-soric does not specifically run any analysis on our raw materials or end product to measure for these substances.

The information provided in this certification notice is correct to the best of di-soric’s knowledge at the date of publication. This notice is not to be considered a warranty or quality specification. Users are responsible for determining the applicability of any RoHS legislation or regulations based on their individual use of the product.

viii


1 Quick Start

Contents

Step 1 Check Hardware................................................................................................................1-2

Step 2 Connect the System ..........................................................................................................1-4

Step 3 Position the Imager............................................................................................................1-6

Step 4 Install di-soric ID................................................................................................................1-7

Step 5 Select Model......................................................................................................................1-8

Step 6 Connect ...........................................................................................................................1-10

Step 7 Locate Symbol................................................................................................................ 1-12

Step 8 Calibrate ..........................................................................................................................1-14

Step 9 Test Read Rate ...............................................................................................................1-15

Step 10 Configure the Imager.................................................................................................... 1-16

Step 11 Save Changes.............................................................................................................. 1-17

This section explains how to set up and test the ID-06 quickly using di-soric ID (Setup Program).

Detailed setup information for installing the imager into an application can be found in subsequent sections.


1-1

Check Hardware

Step 1 — Check Hardware

Standard ID-06

Item

1

2

6

Description

ID-06 Industrial Imager

Interface Device

Power Supply, M12 12-pin Socket, 1.3 m

Part Number

ID-06-IXX-XX-ES

VSID-IB-ES

VSID-PS-24V-ES

Note:

Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the di-soric Product Pricing Catalog.

Note:

The ID-06 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset, because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover (transmit-to-receive switching). di-soric offers a standard straight-through (un-crossed) Ethernet cordset .

Important:

Do not attempt to power more than four imagers with a single power supply in a daisy chain configuration. Add a VSID-IB-ES and one power supply for every four additional imagers in the daisy chain.

1

1

5

2

3

3

7

2

6 8

Serial Standalone (with VSID-IB-ES)

Hardware Required

6

8

Ethernet Standalone (with VSID-IB-ES)

Caution:

Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the system. Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables.

1-2


Quick Start

ID-06 C-Mount

Item

1

2

6

Description

ID-06 Industrial Imager

Interface Device

Power Supply, M12 12-pin Socket, 1.3 m

Part Number

ID-06-IXX-00-ES

VSID-IB-ES

VSID-PS-24V-ES

Note:

Additional cordsets and accessories are available in the di-soric Product Pricing Catalog.

Note:

The ID-06 C-Mount does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset, because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover (transmit-to-receive switching). di-soric offers a standard straight-through (un-crossed) Ethernet cordset

Important:


1

1

5

2

3

3

7

2

6 8


Hardware Required

6

8


Caution:

Be sure that all connections are secure BEFORE applying power to the system. Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables.


1-3

Connect the System

Step 2 — Connect the System

Standard ID-06

Important:

When connecting cordsets to the ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES, align the pins first and then push the connector into place. Do not twist the connectors, as this will bend the pins.

Important:


RS-232

• Connect the Serial Communication Cable from “A” on the ID-06 to “2” on the VSID-IB-

ES.

• Connect the host cable from “1” on the VSID-IB-ES to the host computer.

• Connect the photo sensor to “T” on the VSID-IB-ES.

• Connect the power supply to “3” on the VSID-IB-ES.

• Plug in the power supply.

Ethernet

Note:

The ID-06 does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset, because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover (transmit-to-receive switching). di-soric offers a standard straight-through (un-crossed) Ethernet cordset (61-000160-01).

• Connect the Ethernet Cable from “B” on the ID-06 to the network.


• Connect the power supply to “A” on the ID-06.


1

1

5

2

3

3

7

2

1-4

6

8


6

8



Quick Start

ID-06 C-Mount

Important:

When connecting cordsets to the ID-06 C-Mount and VSID-IB-ES, align the pins first and then push the connector into place. Do not twist the connectors, as this will bend the pins.

Important:


RS-232

• Connect the Serial Communication Cable from “A” on the ID-06 C-Mount to “2” on the

VSID-IB-ES.

• Connect the host cable from “1” on the VSID-IB-ES to the host computer.


• Connect the power supply to “3” on the VSID-IB-ES.


Ethernet

Note:

The ID-06 C-Mount does not require an Ethernet crossover cordset, because the imager itself performs automatic internal crossover (transmit-to-receive switching). di-soric offers a standard straight-through (un-crossed) Ethernet cordset .

• Connect the Ethernet Cable from “B” on the ID-06 C-Mount to the network.


• Connect the power supply to “A” on the ID-06 C-Mount.


1

1

5

2

3

3

7

2

6 8


6

8



1-5

Position the Imager

Step 3 — Position the Imager

• Position the imager at a focal distance of one inch or more from a test symbol.

• Tip the imager relative to the symbol if necessary to avoid the glare of direct (specular) reflection.

• Symbols can be rotated (tilted) at any angle; however, for best results symbols should be aligned with the field of view. In the case of linear symbols, aligning the bars in the direction of their movement (ladder orientation) will minimize the chances of blurring and will result in more consistent decodes.

Standard ID-06 Imager and Symbol Orientation

1-6

ID-06 C-Mount Imager and Symbol Orientation

Important:

Avoid excessive skew or pitch. Maximum skew is ±30°; maximum pitch is ±30°.


Quick Start

Step 4 — Install di-soric ID

di-soric ID Software

can be found on the di-soric Tools Drive or Tools USB Stick that is packaged with the ID-06 and ID-06 C-Mount.

1. Follow the prompts to install di-soric ID from the Tools Drive or Tools USB Stick.

2. Click on the di-soric ID icon to run the program.

Note:

di-soric ID can also be installed from the Download Center at

www.disoric.com

.

Minimum System Requirements

• 233 MHz Pentium processor

• Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit), Vista (32-bit or 64-bit), XP, or 2000 operating system

• Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher

• 128 MB RAM or greater

• 80 MB hard drive space

• 800 x 600 minimum 256 color display (1024 x 768 32-bit color recommended)


1-7

Select Model

Step 5 — Select Model

Standard ID-06

When you start di-soric ID, the model menu will appear:

1. Click the button showing the ID-06.

2. Click OK.

Note:

You can also simply double-click the button showing your imager to make your selection.

3. Click Yes when the following dialog appears:

1-8

Note:

If you need to select another model later, click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model > New Model in the menu toolbar.


ID-06 C-Mount

When you start di-soric ID, the model menu will appear:

Quick Start

1. Click the button showing the ID-06 C-Mount.

2. Click OK.

Note:

You can also simply double-click the button showing your imager to make your selection.

3. Click Yes when the following dialog appears:

Note:

If you need to select another model later, click the Switch Model button near the top of the screen or use Model > New Model in the menu toolbar.


1-9

Connect

Step 6 — Connect

Connection Wizard

To connect using the Connection Wizard:

• Click Connect on the menu toolbar, and then select Connection Wizard.

• Select RS-232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display.

• Configure settings as required by the application, and click Connect.

RS-232 Connection Wizard Ethernet Connection Wizard

• When a connection is established, the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible:

Important:

The imager is in Continuous Read Mode by default. For best connection results, be sure that no decodable symbols are within the imager’s field of view while attempting to connect.

1-10


Quick Start

Step 6 — Connect (cont.)

Ethernet TCP/IP

Once the ID-06 is connected, incoming symbol data can be displayed in the Terminal, as shown below.


1-11

Locate Symbol

Step 7 — Locate Symbol

Locate by di-soric ID

• In di-soric ID’s EZ Mode, click the Locate button to enable the red

X

pattern.

The symbol in the field of view will appear in the video view beneath the Locate and

Calibrate

buttons, and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager.

Note:

The ID-06 C-Mount does not display a target pattern.

• Center the target pattern on the symbol.

Important:

The entire symbol should fall within the field of view (FOV) of the imager. The field of view is what appears in di-soric ID’s Locate/Calibrate window in EZ Mode.

• Click the Stop button to end the Locate function.

1-12


Quick Start

Locate by EZ Button

If you are not connected to a host computer, the EZ Button allows you to locate a symbol in the imager’s field of view.

EZ Button

• Hold down the EZ Button for about one second and release when you hear one short beep. The amber 20% LED will illuminate, and you will see the red target pattern projected from the front of the imager.

• Center the target pattern on the symbol.

Note:

To end all EZ Button functions, press the EZ Button once and quickly release.


1-13

Calibrate

Step 8 — Calibrate

Imager settings can be adjusted automatically for optimum performance by either the EZ

Button or by di-soric ID.

During the calibration routine, the imager will flash its amber Read Rate percent LEDs and illumination LEDs while searching camera settings and determining the best configuration for decoding symbol data. Upon successful completion of this routine, a green LED pattern will flash brightly and illuminate the symbol. If unsuccessful, the imager will emit 5 short beeps and stop searching.

Calibrate by di-soric ID

1. Click the Calibrate button.

2. The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data.

A successful calibration will display a green frame around the symbol, and the following message will appear: “Uploading all reader parameters.” After a moment the symbol data will be presented in the field below the image display window.

Calibrate by EZ Button

1. Hold down the EZ Button for about two seconds and release when you hear two

short beeps

. The 20% and 40% LEDs will illuminate.

2. The imager will search camera settings to determine the best configuration for decoding symbol data.

Note:


Calibrate by Serial Command

Send

<@CAL>

from a terminal program to begin auto-calibration.

1-14


Quick Start

Step 9 — Test Read Rate

Read Rate

indicates the number of successful decodes per second achieved by the imager.

Test Read Rate by di-soric ID

1. Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test.

If a symbol has been successfully decoded, its data and related information will be presented in the field below the image display window. While the symbol is being decoded, the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit.

2. Click the Stop button to end the Read Rate test.

Note:

Read rate can also be tested using the Read Rate interface in Utilities.

Test Read Rate by EZ Button

1. To start the Read Rate test, hold down the EZ Button about three seconds until you hear three short beeps. The 20%, 40%, and 60% LEDs will illuminate.

While the symbol is being decoded, the Read Rate LEDs will indicate the corresponding read rate percentage on the top of the unit.

100%

80%

60%

40%

20%

EZ Button

These LEDs represent the percentage of

Good Reads per images captured.

2. To end the Read Rate test, press the EZ Button and quickly release.

Test Read Rate by Serial Command

You can also start a test with the

<C>

or

<Cp>

command and end it with the

<J>

command.


1-15

Configure the Imager

Step 10 — Configure the Imager

Click the App Mode button to make configuration changes to the imager.

The following modes are accessible by clicking the buttons at the top of the screen:

• Click the EZ Mode button to return to EZ Mode.

• Click the Autoconnect button to establish communication.

• Click the Send/Recv button to send or receive commands.

• Click the Switch Model button to open the model menu, or to return to a previous model.

• Click the Parameters button to show the tabbed tree controls for Communication, Read

Cycle, Symbologies, I/O Parameters, Symbol Quality, Matchcode, and Diagnostics.

• Click the Setup button to access the Camera Setup tree control and the tabbed interfaces for Video, Evaluation, Calibration, Window of Interest (WOI), Configuration Database,

Ordered Output, Output Format, and Dynamic Setup.

• Click the Terminal button to display decoded symbol data and to send serial commands to the imager using text or macros.

• Click the Utilities button to show the tabbed interfaces for Read Rate, Counters, Device

Control, Differences from Default, Master Database, and Firmware.

For further details, see di-soric ID Help in the dropdown Help menu.

1-16


Step 11 — Save Changes

To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls:

Quick Start

1. Left-click on the to expand the

+

desired tree.

2. Double-click on the

3. Place the cursor in the selection box, scroll down to the setting you want to change, and click once on the setting.

desired parameter and click once in the selection box to view options.

4. Left-click again on the open screen to complete the selection.

5. Right-click on the open screen and select Save to

Reader

to implement the command in the imager.

Saving Options

• Send, No Save. Changes will be lost when power is re-applied to the imager.

• Send and Save. This activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power-on.


1-17

Save Changes

1-18


2 Using di-soric ID

Contents

EZ Mode........................................................................................................................................2-2

App Mode......................................................................................................................................2-3

Menu Toolbar ................................................................................................................................2-4

Navigating in di-soric ID ..............................................................................................................2-15

Send/Receive Options ................................................................................................................2-16

This section explains the basic structure and elements of di-soric ID (Setup Pro gram).

When di-soric ID is opened, unless otherwise specified in di-soric ID Preferences, the

EZ Mode view will appear. App Mode contains several tree controls (Communication,

Read Cycle, Symbologies, I/O Parameters, Symbol Quality, Matchcode, and Diag-

nostics), a Setup interface, a Terminal interface, and a Utilities interface.

di-soric ID can be used to configure the ID-06 in three different ways:

• Graphic User Interfaces: Imager settings can be configured using such point-and-click tools as buttons, spin boxes, check boxes, and drag-and-drop functions.

• Tree Controls: Each tree control contains a list of all command settings that pertain to that specific area of imager operation. Each parameter can be configured using dropdown menus or fields where characters can be entered.

• Terminal: di-soric ID’s Terminal allows the user to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the imager by typing them in the provided field.

Information about using specific commands in di-soric ID is provided in subsequent sections.

For di-soric ID system requirements, see

Minimum System Requirements

in Chapter 1,

Quick

Start

.

2-1


EZ Mode

EZ Mode

EZ Mode allows the user to test read rate and calibrate the imager. After connecting to the imager, the EZ Mode view will appear. On-screen instructions assist the user with positioning, testing, and calibration.

Locate/Calibrate/Learn

The calibration routine optimizes the imager by comparing Read Rates at various camera and image processing settings. Click Locate to find the symbol in the field of view and display it in the video view. Then click Calibrate to begin the calibration routine. The Learn button allows you to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded, which allows faster and more consistent processing of subsequent identical symbols.

Test

Click the Test button to start the Read Rate test for a quick indication of the imager’s read capabilities and the limits of the application. When Decodes per Second is unchecked, the test will count the percentage of decodes relative to the number of actual scans. Click

Stop to end the test.

Click Locate to find and display the symbol. Click Calibrate to begin the

calibration routine. Calibration is also explained in

Quick Start

. Click

Learn to save information about the next Data Matrix symbol decoded.

Click the App Mode button to access configuration trees and other setup features.

When Decodes per Second is checked, the read rate test displays how many decodes the imager achieves each second, instead of displaying a percentage.

Click Test button to start the Read Rate test and click Stop to end the test.

Symbol data is displayed here.

ID-062-2

Click here to initiate a sliding focus control.

Contrast brightens the image.


Using di-soric ID

App Mode

From EZ Mode, click on the App Mode button to access the tabbed tree controls in

Parameters, the intuitive user interfaces in Setup, the Terminal interface, and the Utilities interface.

Note: The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes.

Video, Evaluation, Calibration, WOI, Configuration Database,

Ordered Output, Output Format, Dynamic Setup

Click this icon to return to EZ Mode.

Menu toolbar

Click here to open the Terminal view.

Tabbed tree controls

Read Rate,

Counters,

Device Control,

Differences from Default,

Master Database,

Firmware

Autoconnect to the imager, Send and

Receive command settings, and

Switch Model.

Mirror Image reverses the image.

Contrast brightens the image.

Click Capture and Decode to decode the symbol in the field of view, and to see a high resolution image capture of the symbol.

Symbol data is displayed here.


2-3

Menu Toolbar

Menu Toolbar

File

New

Whenever New is selected, the default configuration of di-soric

ID is loaded.

Open/Save

When Save or Save As is selected, the di-soric ID configuration is saved to the host computer’s hard drive and available whenever the same file is selected under Open.

Important: When configuration changes are saved to the hard drive, these changes are not automatically saved to the imager.

The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and received between di-soric ID and the imager, and di-soric ID and the host hard drive.

(Save to Imager)

(Receive Imager

Settings)

Import/Export

Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to di-soric ID configuration settings.

Export converts the active di-soric ID configuration settings to an ASCII text file.

ID-062-4


Using di-soric ID

Model

The Model dropdown menu shows a list of recent imagers that have been used with disoric ID. When a different model is chosen, the connection to the present model is terminated.

To connect to another model, select New Model, choose a new model from the

pop-up menu

that appears, and click OK.

Note: When an di-soric ID file is saved, the settings of all the models defined in that file are saved.


2-5

Menu Toolbar

Options

The Options menu allows the user to save memos and set up di-

soric ID Preferences.

Note: Preferences will be saved and loaded into di-soric ID whenever di-soric ID is opened next, whether or not the di-soric ID file is saved.

Preferences > General Tab

The Toolbar Style options allow the user to determine how di-

soric ID will display the mode options in the two rows at the top of

Reload Last File

At startup, reloads the last file saved to the host computer’s hard drive.

Show Model Prompt

At startup, shows the model menu displaying all supported readers.

Show Connect Prompt

At startup, displays the Would you like to connect to the ID-06? prompt.

Receive After Connect

At startup, loads the imager’s settings into di-soric ID. (This is not recommended if di-soric

ID settings are needed for future use.)

Skip EZ Mode

At startup, skips EZ Mode and opens directly in App Mode.

Enable ‘Send and Save as Customer Defaults’

At startup, enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send/Recv command.

ID-062-6


Preferences > Terminal Tab

Using di-soric ID

Show Non-Printable Characters

When Show Non-Printable Characters is enabled, characters such as “CRLF” will be displayed in the Terminal window. When Enhanced Format is checked, the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting.

Change Keyboard Macros

Clicking the Change Keyboard Macros button brings up the Function Keys dialog. In this dialog, select the desired function key and then enter the macro keystrokes in the associated key map. For example, to make Ctrl-F2 the keystroke to send a trigger character, select F2, then in the Ctrl row, enter <trigger character> and click OK.

Then whenever the Ctrl-F2 keystroke is pressed, the trigger character will start the read cycle.

Note: The F1 key is reserved for opening di-soric ID

Help and the F3 key is reserved for the Find Next function.

Change Font

Allows the user to modify the font used for decode data received from the imager on the Terminal.

Change Echo Font

Allows the user to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal.

Enable Echo

Allows the user to enter command characters in Terminal.

Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus

When Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus is enabled, data from the imager will continue to appear in the Terminal even when di-soric ID is not the top window.


2-7

Menu Toolbar

Preferences > Bar Code Options Tab

Sizing Information

Sets the bar height (in inches) and bar width (in mils, or thousandths of an inch) of user-created symbols.

Example: A bar width of 18 mils is 0.018 inches.

ID-062-8


Preferences > Advanced Tab

Using di-soric ID

The Auto Sync options at the top of the Advanced tab allow the user to determine whether Auto Sync will be enabled automatically in sections of di-soric ID where it is used, or if it will ask before it enables Auto Sync functions.

Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs

If this option box is checked, specific Auto Sync functions can be enabled. Receive Settings

from the Reader will automatically send the imager’s settings to di-soric ID when Auto

Sync is enabled. Send di-soric ID Settings to the Reader will automatically send all imager configuration settings chosen in di-soric ID to the imager. Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not automatically send imager settings to di-soric

ID, or send di-soric ID settings to the imager.

Show Target Pattern During Locate

Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the

Locate routine.

Show Target Pattern During Calibrate

Allows you to determine whether the blue LED target pattern will be on or off during the

Calibrate routine.

Use Higher Quality Images

Sets di-soric ID to output images at a higher resolution than standard JPEG format.

Open Image after Save

When Open Image after Save is enabled, di-soric ID automatically opens saved image captures. Images can be saved from the Evaluation tab in the Camera view, or by right clicking an image in any other image capture view and then saving.

Send XON with Autoconnect

Sends an XON (Begin Transmission) command to the imager before starting the Autoconnect routine.


2-9

Menu Toolbar

Preferences > Advanced Tab (cont.)

Ask to Save di-soric ID File when Quitting

When enabled, prompts the user to save a .di-soric ID file when ending a session.

The .di-soric ID file will be saved in the location specified by the user.

Connect to Readers via TCP/IP

When enabled, shows the TCP/IP Connection Wizard by default.

Use Default Storage Location

When enabled, automatically stores data in di-soric ID’s Application Data folder.

ID-062-10


Using di-soric ID

Document Memo

The information entered in the Document Memo field will appear in a context-sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu.

Model Memo

Similar to Document Memo, the information entered in the Model Memo field will appear in a context-sensitive text box whenever the cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the

Options menu. Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created.

Note: Memos must be saved in a .di-soric ID file to make them available in the next session. If the current session is not saved, any memos that have been entered during the session will be discarded, and will be unavailable in the next session.


2-11

Menu Toolbar

Connect

The Connect dropdown menu allows the user to access the Connection Wizard, as well as the Autoconnect and Configure Multidrop dialogs. Connect and Disconnect can also be performed directly from the dropdown menu without opening a dialog.


To connect using the Connection Wizard:

• Click Connect on di-soric ID’s menu toolbar, and then select Connection Wizard.

• Select RS-232 or Ethernet to activate the appropriate display.

• Configure RS-232 or Ethernet settings as required by the application, and click Connect.

Click the Search button to locate imagers on the network.

RS-232 Connection Wizard

Ethernet Connection Wizard

• When a connection is established, the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible.

ID-062-12


Using di-soric ID

Autoconnect

• If the RS-232 connection attempt fails, use Autoconnect to establish a connection between the imager and the host.

• If the communication port is not the default COM1, use the dropdown menu to change the port.

• Once you have chosen the correct port, click Start to connect.

• When a connection is established, the green indicator in the status bar at the bottom right of the screen will be visible.


2-13

Menu Toolbar

View

The View menu allows the user to move quickly between the

Parameters, Setup, Terminal, and Utilities interfaces without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar. It also allows the user to access the Bar Code Dialog, shown below.

Bar Code Dialog

Symbols can be created in the Bar Code Dialog by typing the text to be encoded. This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols, allowing the user to configure the imager by reading the user-created symbols.

Choose a spatial orientation for the new symbol.

Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to encode new symbols.

Create a caption for the symbol that matches or describes the encoded data.

The symbol will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the

Bar Code Dialog.

ID-062-14


Using di-soric ID

Navigating in di-soric ID

To change imager settings, or to access the Setup, Terminal, or Utilities views, click the

App Mode button.

To return to EZ Mode, click the EZ Mode button.

To make changes to configuration settings in the tree controls:

1. Left-click on the + to expand menu items.

2. Double-click the desired parameter and single-click in the selection box to view options.

3. Place the cursor in the selection box, scroll down to the desired setting, and

single-click the setting.

4. Left-click again on the open screen to complete the selection.

5. Right-click on the open screen and select Save to

Reader to implement the command in the imager.

The command can be sent without saving, or sent and saved simultaneously.

The

X indicates that the setting is

default.


2-15

Send/Receive Options

Send/Receive Options

To access Receive, Save, and Default options, click the Send/Recv button. These options can also be reached by right-clicking in any of the configuration views.

Receiving

From the Send/Recv menu, select Receive Reader Settings.

Caution: Selecting this option will upload the imager’s settings. If the di-soric ID file has a number of custom settings that must be maintained and downloaded into the imager, these settings will be lost.

This function is useful for receiving (uploading) the imager’s settings and saving them as a file for future use. For example, if the imager has settings that must not change, Receive

Reader Settings would load those settings to di-soric ID and save them in an di-soric ID file for later retrieval.

Receiving the imager’s settings will also assure that any unwanted subsequent changes in di-soric ID will not be saved.

Saving

Send, No Save (

<A>

)

Saves di-soric ID settings to current memory.

Send and Save (

<Z>

)

Activates all changes in current memory and saves to the imager for power-on.

Send and Save as Customer Defaults (

<Zc>

)

Saves default settings for quick retrieval.

This option will be visible only if Enable ‘Send and Save as Customer Defaults’ is checked in di-soric ID Preferences.

ID-062-16


Using di-soric ID

Defaulting

When Default Current Menu Settings or Default all di-soric ID Settings are selected, only the di-soric ID settings are defaulted.

Advanced Options

Send Current View

This is the same as Save to Reader

> Send No Save except that only the commands in the current configuration tree are sent.

Send Current Command

This is the same as Send Current

View, except that it saves only the command that is currently selected.

Add/Remove Exception

After a Receive Reader Settings command is performed

1

and the Add Exception option is selected, a list of serial commands may appear. These are commands that may be in the imager’s firmware, but are not included in, or are different from, the current version of di-

soric ID.

These commands can be edited by double-clicking them and changing them as needed.

It is important to note that these commands will be saved to the imager whenever a Save

to Reader command is sent, or when an

<A>

or a

<Z>

command is sent.

Also, if there is a corresponding di-soric ID menu item, the di-soric ID Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command.

1. From the Send/Recv button or by right-clicking in any blank section of a tree control view.


2-17

Send/Receive Options

ID-062-18


3 Hardware Integration

Contents

Connectors ................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Cordsets ....................................................................................................................................... 3-3

ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES Connectors and Pinouts........................................................................... 3-4

Power and Trigger Switching........................................................................................................ 3-9

Port Routing................................................................................................................................ 3-10

Application Examples ................................................................................................................. 3-11

This section introduces the details of ID-06 hardware, and explains how that hardware can be integrated in an application.


3-1

Connectors

Connectors

Industrial cabling and connectivity schemes must be able to withstand environmental extremes of heat, cold, and moisture, and be secure enough not to be disconnected or damaged inadvertently in the course of day-to-day operation.

The current industry standard for connectivity is a sealed, circular connector such as the

M12. The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

standard for M12 connectors

describes them as fixed and free screw-locking connectors. This type of connector is widely available off-the-shelf from manufacturers such as

Turck

,

Lumberg

,

Phoenix Contact

, or

Binder

.

di-soric has adopted connectivity because of speed, ease-of-use, and ingress protection considerations. The main advantage of the system is that only two steps are required at every connection point:

1. Align the connector and receptacle keys;

2. Push the connector into place. (Do not twist the connector, as this can bend the pins.)

connectors are “operator-independent”. This means that they are not subject to undertightening or over-tightening, both of which are common problems with screw-down connectors, and both of which undermine the moisture-resistant seal.

Another advantage of the ID-06’s connectivity scheme is that the receptacles on the imagers and the VSID-IB-ES Interface Device also accept screw-down connectors, giving users the flexibility to use either or screw-down connectors.

3-2


Hardware Installation

Cordsets

The terms “cordset” and “cable” are both applicable to industrial connectivity, but they are not synonymous. Cordsets enable communications and power between imagers and interface devices. Cordsets have an M12 connector at one or both ends. Examples of cordsets are shown below.

VKHM-Z-1/12DB9-K M12 to M12 Cordset

VKHM-Z-1/RJ45 M12 to RJ45 (Ethernet) Cordset

Cables do not have M12 connectors at either end. An example of a cable is shown below.

Cable with flying leads


3-3

ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES Connectors and Pinouts

ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES Connectors and Pinouts

When deploying a network of imagers and interface devices in an industrial setting, it is important to use components whose pin assignments are arranged in a way that avoids communication errors and equipment damage. This can be achieved with components that are designed in a logical, consistent, and easy-to-implement way.

The ID-06 has a very simple pin assignment methodology. The clearly identified connectors at the back of the unit can be used to receive and bus power, and also to send and receive data and commands.

ID-06 Connectors

New Master

Output 1

Output 2

Default

Power

Output 3

RS-232

(Host) TxD

Trigger

Ground

Input Common

Output Common

RS-232 (Host) RxD

A (All Models) M12 12-pin Plug

5

6

3

4

7

8

Pin Function

1

Wire Color

Trigger White

2 Power Brown

Default

New Master

Output 1

Output 3

Ground

Input Common

Green

Yellow

Gray

Pink

Blue

Red

9 RS-232 (Host) RxD Black

10 RS-232 (Host) TxD Violet

11 Output 2

12 Output Common

Gray/Pink

Red/Blue

3-4

Continued next page

A is a serial M12 12-pin plug. It is the same for all models of the ID-06.

B is a serial M12 12-pin socket for serial models and an Ethernet M12 8-pin socket for Ethernet models.



ID-06 and VSID-IB-ES Connectors and Pinouts (continued)

Ground

RS-422/485 RxD (–)

Input

Common

RS-232 TxD/

RS-232 RTS

Trigger TX (+)

Terminated

RX (–)

Terminated

RS-422/485

RxD (+)

RS-232 RxD/

RS-232 CTS

Power

RS-422/485

TxD (+)

Input 1

Terminated

RS-422/485 TxD (–)

B (Serial Models) M12 12-pin Socket

6

7

4

5

8

9

Pin Function

1

2

3

Trigger

Power

Terminated

Input 1

Port 3 422/485 TxD (+)

Port 3 422/485 RxD (+)

Ground

Input Common

Port 2 TxD/Port 1 RTS

10 Port 2 RxD/Port 1 CTS

11 Port 3 422/485 TxD (–)

12 Port 3 422/485 RxD (–)

Wire Color

White

Brown

Green

Yellow

Gray

Pink

Blue

Red

Black

Violet

Gray/Pink

Red/Blue

RX (+)

Terminated

TX (–)

Terminated

B (Ethernet Models) M12 8-pin Socket

6

7

4

5

8

Pin Function

1

2

3

Terminated

Terminated

Terminated

TX (–)

RX (+)

TX (+)

Terminated

RX (–)


3-5


Grounding the ID-06

Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety, noise reduction, and the protection of equipment from voltage transients. Buildings, including any steelwork, all circuits, and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes.

ID-06

An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager.

Ground Loops

Ground loops (signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices) can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host, imager, and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground.

3-6



Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation

Grounding Notes:

• Ensure that mounting bracket “Earth” is at the same potential as power source “Earth”.

• Supply “Return” and “Earth” ground must be stable, low-impedance reference points.

• “2-Terminal Power Supply” must still provide an “Earth” connection to the imager.

• “Signal Ground” can be used for communications and/or discrete signal ground reference.

It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground.


3-7


VSID-IB-ES Interface Device

The VSID-IB-ES Interface Device’s receptacles are physically the same as those on the ID-

06, but they do not have explicit pin assignments. The VSID-IB-ES allows users to bus power and communications as required by the application.

Connectors 1 and 3 are 12-pin plugs, and Connector 2 is a 12-pin socket.

All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data as required by the application.

The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed.

1, 3

1, 3,

T

PWR

TRIG

1, 2,

3

1, 2,

3, T

VSID-IB-ES Interface

Pin Assignment

1 + 10-28V

2

3

4

Trig/NM/Input 1

Common

Ground

Trigger

VSID-IB-ES Trigger Connector 4-pin

This simple diagram (shown on the base of the VSID-IB-ES) illustrates how power, communications, I/O, and trigger signal can be routed through the VSID-IB-ES device depending on the needs of the application. The switches greatly increase signal routing flexibility.

3-8

VSID-IB-ES Communications - I/O - Power - Trigger



Power and Trigger Switching

1, 3

1, 3,

T

PWR

TRIG

1, 2,

3

1, 2,

3, T

Power can be bussed between imagers and interface devices. At each location on a network where a new power supply is added, the Power switch on the VSID-IB-ES can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1, 3, and T.

The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors

1, 3, and T can be broken using the Trigger switch. This isolates trigger signals as required by the application.


3-9

Port Routing

Port Routing

The physical advantages created by flexible signal routing and switching are enhanced further by Port Routing, which can be configured in di-soric ID. Port Routing eliminates the need for dedicated “Host” and “Aux” ports in a traditional sense. With Port Routing, any port can be defined as a Host or Aux port. Port Routing also allows users to define the data types that are accessible from specific ports.

The primary benefit of Port Routing is that any type of data can be routed to any port, and can be sent through multiple ports simultaneously. Multiple types of data can also be appended to the symbol data that is output from the imager to the host. Command data, symbol data, extra symbol information, and diagnostic data are enabled by default in the ID-06.

The table below lists different types of data, with examples for each data type.

Data Type

Command Data

Symbol Data

Extra Symbol Information

Diagnostic Data

Example

Serial commands; imager responses to serial commands.

Any string of data encoded in a symbol.

Decodes per trigger, decode direction, configuration database index number.

Service message.

The screen capture below (from di-soric ID) shows the ID-06’s four communications ports and the parameters for each.

RS-232 A, RS-232 B, and RS-422 are serial. RS-232 A is always enabled. RS-232

B and RS-422 can be enabled or disabled to match the physical requirements of the application. Ethernet can also be enabled or disabled as required.

RS-232 A, RS-232 B, and RS-422 can be configured for Baud Rate, Parity, Stop Bits,

Data Bits, Symbol Data Output, Extra Symbol

Information (Decodes Before Output, Symbol

Position Output, etc.), Diagnostics Output, and External Source Processing Mode

(Command or Data).

Ethernet can be configured for IP Address,

Subnet Mask, Gateway, IP Address Mode,

Symbol Data Output, Extra Symbol Information, Diagnostics Output, and External

Source Processing Mode.

3-10



Application Examples

The following examples demonstrate how the components described in previous pages can be deployed in industrial applications.


3-11

Application Examples

Ethernet TCP/IP

Ethernet TCP/IP is the standard Ethernet interface used to connect multiple locations in a network, such as computers in an office network. It can also be used to network other communications devices, such as imagers and PLCs on a factory floor.

The highlighted areas below demonstrate how an Ethernet daisy chain can be arranged.

Ethernet-enabled imagers can also be set up in standalone configurations, or multiple

Ethernet-enabled imagers along a production or packaging line can be connected to Ethernet.

3-12


4 Setup

Contents

Video............................................................................................................................................. 4-2

Evaluation ................................................................................................................................... 4-18

Calibration................................................................................................................................... 4-21

Window of Interest ...................................................................................................................... 4-22

Configuration Database .............................................................................................................. 4-24

Ordered Output........................................................................................................................... 4-33

Output Format............................................................................................................................. 4-37

Dynamic Setup ........................................................................................................................... 4-41

This section describes di-soric ID’s Setup interfaces:

Video

,

Evaluation

,

Calibration

,

Window of Interest

,

Configuration Database

,

Ordered Output

,

Output Format

, and

Dynamic Setup

. Each interface allows the user to make changes to imager configuration

quickly and easily.


4-1

Video

Video

The Video view allows the user to perform the same Locate, Calibrate, and Test routines.

There is also a focal distance adjustment tool to the right of the video view.

Video also features simple Capture and Decode functionality.

4-2


Setup

Learn

The Learn command, located in di-soric ID’s EZ Mode and in the Setup section on the

Video tab, puts the ID-06 into a mode of operation that will cause it to “learn” the next Data

Matrix symbol decoded. Learn Mode remains active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or Learn Mode is disabled by re-clicking the Learn button. Upon decoding a Data

Matrix symbol, the ID-06’s image processing will save pertinent information about the learned symbol so that subsequent identical symbols will be processed more quickly.

See

Learn Operations

in

Utilities

for other Learn commands that can be sent serially.

Click the Learn button to start Data Matrix Learn Mode.

The Learn button will say “Learning” during the learn operation.

The Learn button will say “Learned” when the Data Matrix symbol has been learned.

The learn state and parameters persist in the same way as ordinary parameters.

Examples:

• A ID-06 in a Learned state has not been saved. Cycling power will remove any Learned state information and the imager will power-on in its configured state.

• A ID-06 is saved in a Learning state. The imager will power-on in the Learning state and will learn the first Data Matrix symbol decoded.

• A ID-06 is saved in a Learned state. The imager will power-on in the Learned state and will only decode the learned symbol type.

• A ID-06 in a Learned state is issued a reset default command

<Ard>

. The unit will return to an Unlearned state but if power is cycled it will return to its saved state.


4-3

Video

Select Lens (Standard ID-06 Only)

This value must reflect the correct camera lens currently installed on the product. This value is configured after leaving the factory. However, since the lens can be changed by the user, this parameter needs to be updated to reflect the currently installed lens.

Click the Select Lens button on the Video tab.

To verify lens type, turn off power to the ID-06 (do not look into the targeting laser). Then look at the outer rim of the unit’s camera lens. The following markings define the correct

“Lens Type” parameter value:

‘.’, and “15”

‘..’, and “30”

= Lens Type 1

= Lens Type 2

‘...’, and “45” = Lens Type 3

When a lens is changed on the ID-06, the user can optimize the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the

<@OPTIC>

command.

Important: <@OPTIC>

is not supported by the ID-06 C-Mount Imager.

This parameter is “sticky”. Once saved with a

<Z>

or

<Zc>

command, it can only be

“defaulted” with

<Zrdall>

or

<K525d>

.

15 Degree Lens


4-4



Camera Setup

Click the App Mode button and then the Setup button.

You will see the Camera Setup tree control to the right of the Video interface.

Setup

The

*

indicates that the setting is the default.

To open nested options,

single-click the +.

To change a setting,

double-click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options.

Note: Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format.


4-5

Camera Setup

CMOS (WVGA) Camera Settings

Gain

Sets the gain value for the image sensor. This setting can be configured through autocalibration, and is the recommended method for configuring this settings. A higher value will increase the brightness of the image, but the noise performance of the system is reduced. Prior to configuring the gain, the required shutter speed should be set, and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting.

Shutter Speed

This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels. The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical. If an object is moving fast and a slow shutter speed is selected, blurring or smearing of the object will occur. As shutter speed is increased the amount of light required or gain needed has to be increased since the pixels exposure time has decreased.

4-6


Setup

CCD (SXGA) Camera Settings

Gain

Sets the gain value for the image sensor. This setting can be configured through autocalibration, and is the recommended method for configuring this settings. A higher value will increase the brightness of the image, but the noise performance of the system is reduced. Prior to configuring the gain, the required shutter speed should be set, and the gain should be configured to optimize the shutter speed setting.

Shutter Speed

This value sets the exposure or integration time for the image sensor pixels. The shutter speed setting in relation to the speed of the object is critical. If an object is moving fast and a slow shutter speed is selected, blurring or smearing of the object will occur. As shutter speed is increased the amount of light required or gain needed has to be increased since the pixels exposure time has decreased.


4-7

Camera Setup

Illumination Type (Standard ID-06 Only)

Mode

Configures the illumination pattern. “Bright Field” is used for most applications.

For Mode 4, the internal illumination is always off, similar to configuration setting 0 (Always Off).

Bright Field

Mode 2

Mode 3

Mode 4 (Internal LEDs Off)

Brightness

Configures the amount of illumination output from the unit’s built-in lighting.

4-8


Setup

External Light (ID-06 C-Mount Only)

Disabled

When External Light is set to Disabled, the external smart light control is disabled and Output 3 is available for any other operation.

Always On

When External Light is set to Always On, the external smart light is continuously on.

Always Off

When External Light is set to Always Off, the external smart light is continuously off.

On Only When in Read Cycle

When External Light is set to On Only When in Read Cycle, the external smart light will be on when the imager is in an active read cycle.

Important Note: The external light's active state is controlled through the Output State of

Output 3, which is used as the external control line.

To control the external light using a di-soric standard 12-pin-to-5-pin external light control cable, set Output 3's Output State to Normally Closed and Output Common to ground.

Any other settings that relate to Output 3, such as Output 3 Diagnostics will be ignored if this mode is enabled. The external light will be continuously on until the system is fully rebooted.


4-9

Camera Setup

Focus Distance

Provides focal distance adjustment for the camera.

When “Distance units” is set to “millimeters”, the Focal Distance parameter has a range of

25 to 4000. Any value outside this range will be rejected.

When “Distance units” is set to “1/100 inch”, Focal Distance is limited to a range of 100 to

4000. If the user attempts to set the Focal distance to less than 100 (1 inch), the parameter will be set to 100.

When a lens is changed on the ID-06, the user can improve the accuracy of the Focal Distance parameter by using the

<@OPTIC>

command.



Even after running

<@OPTIC>

the system distance accuracy is approximate. The command gives reasonable step sizes as apposed to completely unknown magnitudes but it is not expected that 2 units will exhibit the same exact focus for a given setting.

Distance Units

Defines the measurement unit value of the Focal Distance parameter.

Required Focal DistanceDistance Units = millimeter (0) Distance Units = 1/00 inch (1)

4-10


Setup

Sub-Sampling

The camera can be enabled to sub-sample pixels in the specified image frame. Sub-sampling can be specified as either 4:1 or 16:1, which signifies the sampling rate.

Note: Sub-Sampling is not available for the CCD model of the ID-06.

4:1

1 pixel output for every 4 pixels sampled. When selected the image will be sampled 2:1 in the vertical direction and 2:1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 4:1 ratio. An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 320 x 240.

16:1

1 pixel output for every 16 pixels sampled. When selected the image will be sampled 4:1 in the vertical direction and 4:1 in the horizontal direction for a combined 16:1 ratio. An image with a dimension of 640 x 480 will be scaled to 160 x 120.


4-11

Camera Setup

CMOS (WVGA) Window of Interest

The active pixel area of the image sensor is defined as the “Window of Interest” (WOI).

This allows the user to select an area in the Field of View that the desired symbol will be located. The programmable window of interest is useful for increasing decode speed, improving threshold, selecting desired symbol from multiple symbols in FOV. The user provides the upper-left pixel location and the size in both rows and columns to define the

Window of Interest.

Important Notes:

• The column width value is required to be a modulus 32 value, so regardless of the column width setting that is configured the actual column width will be decreased (if required) to a modulus 32 value. For example a column width value of 632 would actually be 608. A user request of this setting would still return 632.

• The column pointer is required to be an even value, so regardless of the column pointer setting that is configured the actual column pointer will be decreased (if required) to an even value. For example a column pointer value of 101 would actually be 100. A user request of this setting would still return 101.

Top

Defines the row position of the upper-left starting point of the image window.

Left

Defines the column position of the upper-left starting point of the image window.

4-12


Setup

Height

Defines the size, in rows, of the image window. Maximum value is defined as the Maximum row size of Image sensor, minus the row pointer value.

Width

Defines the size, in columns, of the image window. Maximum value is defined as the Maximum column size of Image sensor, minus the column pointer value.


4-13

Camera Setup

CCD (SXGA) Window of Interest

The active pixel area of the image sensor is defined as the “Window of Interest” (WOI).

This allows the user to select an area in the Field of View that the desired symbol will be located. The programmable window of interest is useful for increasing decode speed, improving threshold, selecting desired symbol from multiple symbols in FOV. The user provides the upper-left pixel location and the size in both rows and columns to define the

Window of Interest.

Important Notes:

• The column width value is required to be a modulus 32 value, so regardless of the column width setting that is configured the actual column width will be decreased (if required) to a modulus 32 value. For example a column width value of 632 would actually be 608. A user request of this setting would still return 632.

• The column pointer is required to be an even value, so regardless of the column pointer setting that is configured the actual column pointer will be decreased (if required) to an even value. For example a column pointer value of 101 would actually be 100. A user request of this setting would still return 101.

Top

Defines the row position of the upper-left starting point of the image window. An Increase in this value will cause an increase in frame rate at a resolution of 46 microseconds (row period). If this value is changed and the resulting combination of row pointer plus row depth exceeds the maximum allowed, the row depth will be decreased to an acceptable value.

Left

Defines the column position of the upper-left starting point of the image window. If this value is changed and the resulting combination of column pointer plus column width exceeds the maximum allowed, the column width will be decreased to an acceptable value.

4-14


Setup

Height

Defines the size, in rows, of the image window. Maximum value is defined as the Maximum row size of Image sensor, minus the row pointer value. A decrease in this value, coupled with an increase in the row pointer value, will cause an increase in frame rate at a resolution of 46 microseconds (row period).

Width

Defines the size, in columns, of the image window. Maximum value is defined as the Maximum column size of Image sensor, minus the column pointer value. Changing this parameter will have no effect on frame rate.


4-15

Camera Setup

Image Processing Settings

Image Processing Timeout

See

Image Processing Timeout

in

Read Cycle

.

Capture Mode

See

Capture Mode

in

Read Cycle

.

Morphological Pre-Processing

Morphological Pre-Processing allows the user to select the method for processing images, and to choose the operator size for that method.

Important: This command must be set to Enabled for Morphological Operation to function.

Morphological Operation and Operator Size

Operation

Morphological Operation allows the user to select the method for processing captured images.

Erode

Erode increases the dark cell size of a symbol. Useful for increasing the dark cell size of a dark-on-light Data Matrix symbol.

Dilate

Dilate increases the light cell size of a symbol. Useful for increasing the light cell size of a light-on-dark Data Matrix symbol.

4-16


Setup

Open

Open removes minor light defects of dark cells by performing a Dilate function followed by an Erode function.

Close

Close removed minor dark defects of light cells by performing an Erode function followed by a Dilate function.

Operator Size

Operator Size determines the size of the area or “pixel neighborhood” (measured in pixels) in which the morphological operation is being performed.

Small (3 pixels by 3 pixels)

Medium (5 pixels by 5 pixels)

Large (7 pixels by 7 pixels)


4-17

Evaluation

Evaluation

In Evaluation, you can view images currently in the imager, capture and decode a symbol, save it as a digital file, and perform histogram and line scan evaluations.

When you click on the Evaluation tab, you will see the images that are currently stored in the imager.

Click Receive to refresh this view.

Click Capture/Decode to display the and decode event will occur, regardless of read cycle settings.

Click Read to trigger a read cycle. If there is enough time in the read cycle, up to 32 good reads (or 6 full-scale images) can be captured and displayed, depending on the size of the images, and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures under Capture Mode in the Camera

Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs.

If you click Save, the current image will be saved to the location of your choice.

Note: An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to di-soric ID.

JPEG images will be saved as .jpg, and bitmaps will be saved as .bmp.

When you click the JPEG Image box, notice that the Line Scan button is grayed out.

The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers, but since the JPEG standard compresses image data, it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation.

JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality (resolution) by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100, 1 being the lowest quality and 100 being the highest.

When possible, use the highest quality; when image transfer speed must be increased, use a lower image quality setting. Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations.

4-18


Setup

Histogram

The Histogram function is useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols. A histogram is a graphic representation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity (gray level) in an image. The horizontal axis represents the values of gray levels, and the vertical axis represents the number of pixels for each gray level.

Note: Since histograms are performed in the imager, the results will be saved regardless of whether the image was uploaded as a JPEG (.jpg) or a bitmap (.bmp).

1. From the Evaluation window, click the Histogram button.

The current image is transferred into the histogram operation. This may take a moment, since all the relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively.

2. When the Histogram window opens, you may need to expand the window and/or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view.

3. To generate a histogram, click and drag your cursor diagonally across the symbol or a portion of the symbol.

The image will be surrounded by an “area of interest box”, a dashed blue line with red anchor points that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box, and can be resized by clicking and dragging the anchor points.


4-19

Evaluation

Line Scan

1. From the Evaluation tab, click the Line Scan button. A window like that shown below will appear.

2. Drag your cursor horizontally across the image.

This will create a dashed horizontal line. Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and light pixels will be displayed below the image.

4-20

When you center your cursor over the dashed line, it becomes a double arrow cross.

This allows you to move the line anywhere in the window. You can also use your keyboard arrows to move the line incrementally in any direction.

As with the histogram, the line scan compares light and dark pixels, but in a spatial distribution. On the Y axis of the graph below, 0 is black and 255 is white; the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan.

When you click anywhere on the graph, a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value (in terms of black-to-white) are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph (237 in this example). In addition, a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value.


Setup

Calibration

The Calibration interface in di-soric ID is a powerful and intuitive way to optimize the imager’s performance. It allows the user to control several complex, simultaneous calibration operations, and to follow the progress of those operations using cues such as progress bars, real-time representations of calibration values, and other dynamic user feedback.

di-soric ID’s Calibration interface shown during a calibration routine di-soric ID’s Calibration interface shown after a calibration routine


4-21

Window of Interest

Window of Interest

The active pixel area of the image sensor is called the Window of Interest (WOI). The WOI allows the user to select an area of the field of view in which the desired symbol is located.

The programmable window of interest increases decode speed, improves threshold, and makes it easy to select specific symbols from among several in the field of view. The user provides the upper-left pixel location and the size of the window to define the Window of

Interest.

Window of Interest (CMOS)

Window of Interest (CCD)

Caution: Window of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications.

4-22


Setup

Window of Interest Graphic Interface

1. From the Camera menu, click the WOI tab to bring up Window of Interest.

If you haven’t already captured an image, click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image. If successful, the Good Read indicator on the WOI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below.

Note: You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the di-soric ID window from the lower right corner. This is useful where very small symbols are being read.

2. Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading.

Notice that the surrounding area goes black.

You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to resize the region of interest. You can also click on the center of the window of interest and move it.

3. Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode.

Note: To remove the window of interest, click the Reset button or click anywhere in the WOI pane.

Note that all pixels not in the WOI are defined as black.

Because the imager has far less processing to do in a smaller window, read rates typically increase dramatically. One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window. Always verify that your WOI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your field of view.


4-23

Configuration Database


The Configuration Database allows the user to manage multiple configuration profiles. It is a useful tool in applications that require several different imager configurations to be applied sequentially, and it allows the user to perform far more complex operations than would be possible with only one set of configuration parameters.

Configuration Database view, CMOS, set for 5 Active Indexes, with Capture Settings highlighted

As soon as the number of active database settings is something other than 0, the database is enabled. Once enabled, the current configuration settings (that are handled by the database) have no impact on imager operation.

Capture Index

Each index in the database (1 – 10) can be configured and tested individually.

4-24


Shutter Speed (CMOS)

Sets the camera’s shutter speed (60 – 40,000, default 2,500) for the selected index.

Setup

Shutter Speed (Standard ID-06 CCD)


Shutter Speed (ID-06 C-Mount CCD)


Gain (CMOS)

Sets the camera’s gain (0 – 33, default 20) for the selected index.

Gain (CCD)

Sets the camera’s gain (0 – 64, default 20) for the selected index.

Focal Distance (Standard ID-06 Only)

Sets the camera’s focal distance (25 – 4,000, default 80) for the selected index.

Sub-Sampling (Standard ID-06 Only)

Sets the sub-sampling rate (4:1 or 16:1, Disabled by default) for the selected index.

Important: Sub-Sampling has no effect when the “Image Dimension” mode is configured as Region of Interest in the Database Mode command. This is because the camera Window of Interest is determined by the software based on the database ROI setup and there is no benefit to sub-sampling to increase speed, as the frame size would have to be increased to account for the sub-sampling.

Top/Left/Height/Width (CMOS)

The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command.

Top: 0 to (480 – height) Default: 0

Left: 0 to (752 – width) Default: 0

Height: 3 to (480 – top) Default: 480

Width: 8 to (752 – left) Default: 752


4-25


Top/Left/Height/Width (CCD)

The image dimension settings can be applied as a Window of Interest or a Region of Interest depending on the image dimension mode selected in the Database Mode command.

Top: 0 to (960 – height) Default: 0

Left: 0 to (1280 – width) Default: 0

Height: 3 to (960 – top) Default: 960

Width: 8 to (1280 – left) Default: 1280

Symbol Type

This field allows the user to configure the database to operate on specific symbol types for selected database index. Symbol type-specific parameters must be configured with the appropriate symbol type command. For example fixed length Code 128 is required; it must be set up with the Code 128 command

<K474>

. To configure a symbol type, simply add the number value associated with the symbol type to the field parameter.

Example: If Data Matrix and Code 39 are required the parameter would be 2 + 16 = 18.

Disabled

When disabled, the database uses the current Symbol Type setup to determine active symbol types.

Any Type

All of the preceding symbol types, except Pharmacode, are enabled while this database index is being used.

<K255>

: Add 1.

Data Matrix

If enabled, Data Matrix will be active for this database index.

Important:

The ECC Level must be configured using the Data Matrix command

<K479>

.

If no ECC level has been configured, then it will not decode a Data Matrix symbol.

<K255>

: Add 2.

QR Code

If enabled, QR Code will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 4.

4-26


Code 128

If enabled, Code 128 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 8.

Code 39


<K255>

: Add 16.

Codabar

If enabled, Codabar will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 32.

Code 93


<K255>

: Add 64.

Interleaved 2of 5

If enabled, Interleaved 2of 5 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 128.

UPC

If enabled, UPC will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 256.

PDF417

If enabled, PDF417 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 512.

MicroPDF417

If enabled, MicroPDF417 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 1024.

BC412

If enabled, BC412 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 2048.


Setup

4-27


Pharmacode

If enabled, Pharmacode will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 4096.

DataBar-14

If enabled, DataBar-14 will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 8192.

DataBar Limited

If enabled, DataBar Limited will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 16384.

DataBar Expanded

If enabled, DataBar Expanded will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 32768.

Micro QR Code

If enabled, Micro QR Code will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 65536.

Aztec

If enabled, Aztec will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 131072.

Current Postal Symbology

If enabled, Current Postal Symbology will be active for this database index.

<K255>

: Add 262144.

4-28


Setup

Morphology Operation

Allows the user to select the method for processing captured images.

Parameter values for serial command <K255> :

0 – Disable

1 – Erode

2 – Dilate

3 – Open

4 – Close

Morphology Size

Determines the size of the area or “pixel neighborhood” (measured in pixels) in which the morphological operation is being performed.

Parameter values for serial command <K255> :

3 – Small (3 pixels by 3 pixels)

5 – Medium (5 pixels by 5 pixels)

7 – Large (7 pixels by 7 pixels)


4-29


Database and Capture Modes

The configuration database behaves the same for both “Rapid” and “Continuous” Capture

Mode, the only discernable difference is in “Rapid” capture mode the database incrementing always operates in “Number of Image Frames” with a “frame count” of 1.

Camera Settings

When the database loads a camera configuration and there is a change in shutter speed

(integration time), window of interest (WOI), or sub-sampling from the last image that was captured; Then one image frame needs to be processed to setup the new configuration prior to capturing an image.

The capture will start immediately following the integration period.

If the image dimensions are configured as a Region of Interest (ROI), then a change to these values does not incur the additional image frame since it is no longer a camera setting.

Since some image capture events require that an image frame delay occur and some don’t, this does complicate the image capture time when the Configuration Database is enabled.

Notes:

• If no camera change occurs, the start of the image capture is immediate upon being triggered

• If a camera change occurs, the start of the image capture occurs after the shutter time has completed. In the case above, the image capture would incur a 1ms delay.

Number of Active Indexes

Number of database records (groups of settings) that will be used automatically during the read cycle. If set to 0, the imager only uses the current settings, not database entry settings.

Sort Database

Activates a sort function that move the database entry associated with the last decode to the first position in the database and move all other entries up.

4-30


Setup

Database Mode

Switch Mode

Selects the event that causes the imager to load the next entry from the database to current, active settings. When timer/count expires and “Image Process Looping” is enabled the next database entry that has a camera modification will be used.

Notes:

Capture event always occurs when the 1st database entry is used.

This setting has no effect in Rapid Capture mode.

Rapid Capture mode always operates in “Number of Frames” mode, with a “Frame Count” = 1.

Time

The imager will load the next entry from the database to current after a defined time interval.

The timer will start upon use of a database entry. In other words, if the timer expires during a capture event, the timer will not start again until the database entry has been incremented and the new entry has been loaded to current.

Number of Image Frames

Database index is incremented after the specified number of image frames have been captured.

Frame Count/Time

Indicates the “Number of Frames” that will occur or the amount of “Time” that is required before the imager will load the next database configuration. Timer resolution is 1ms.

Image Process Looping

This feature is useful for processing a captured image frame multiple times with different

Image Process/Decode parameters.

Disabled

An image is captured for every database configuration, regardless if a camera setting has been modified.

Enabled

When a database configuration is loaded to current, and the Camera settings have not changed from last capture event, a new image is not captured. But rather the last image frame that was captured is re-processed with the new Image Processing/Decode configuration.

The one exception is with the 1st database index, a new image is always captured when the 1st database configuration is used. When a camera setting has been modified from one database setting to the next, a new image is captured. For example, if all database entries contained the same camera setting values, but had different IP/Decode configurations, the only time an image frame would be captured would be when the 1st database configuration was used.


4-31


Image Dimensions

This feature defines how the image dimension parameters are implemented.

Window of Interest (WOI)

In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Camera Settings and dictate the size of the image to be captured.

Region of Interest (ROI)

In this mode the database image dimension parameters are Image Processing\Decode

Settings and specify the region or area of the captured image to be processed. The ROI coordinate data is based on the full scale image size. The WOI of the captured image will be configured to cover all the active database ROI settings. In the following example there are three active database setting, with different ROI configurations. Their coordinates are based at point 0,0 of the full scale image (SXGA = 1280 x 1024 or VGA = 640 X 480). The image WOI is not configurable, it is automatically setup by the database, based on the ROI settings.

This feature is intended to be used in conjunction with the “Image Process Looping” feature, to allow processing different regions of a captured image with different Image Processing

Decode Settings. In addition, if combined with “Output Filtering” the user can order the output of decoded symbols in a captured image frame by their location in the Field of View.

Multiple Symbols with Same Symbol Data Operation

ROI can be used to decode more than one of the same symbols and treat them as different symbols. Multi Symbol Operation will work within the following rules:

• Multiple symbols of same symbol data can only be handled by using ROI mode. This can only be done between different ROI IP Region settings.

• ROI IP Region settings within the database must be sequential (Not Interlaced) in order to correctly know when a new region has been tried. If Database slot 2 and 3 are swapped, the imager would then treat them as 4 separate ROI regions. This would result in 4 different symbols with GDR of 1 instead of 2 different symbols with GDR count of 2.

• ROI Regions will count the same symbol in the same region as additional decodes, but only spanning multiple frames. Each decode of same symbol with same ROI will add to the GDR count with additional frames.

• Multiple symbols can be within each ROI Region but cannot identify multiple Same

Symbols. If same symbol is in a ROI twice per frame then it will be counted as 1 decode or 1 more GDR count, the second will be ignored.

• Filtering can only be done with database # because all other data is same.

4-32


Setup

Ordered Output

Output filtering is a method of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output. There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output. The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle. Each filter has settings for the following six parameters: Filter Number, Symbology Type, Length,

Wildcard, Placeholder, Matching Data, Decode Direction, and Database Number.

Filter Number, Symbology Type, Length, Wildcard, Placeholder, and Matching Data are all displayed in the table below. Double-clicking on any row of the table will display the Ordered

Output Filter Settings dialog, where settings can be changed.

Receive settings from the imager, Send settings to the imager, or Send and Save settings.

Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters. 0 disables all output filters. Any non-zero numeral will enable output filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value.

For example, if the number of filters is 5, then filter indexes 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 will be applied.


4-33

Ordered Output

Filter Number

This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle. This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position.

Symbology Type

Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output.

Note: To filter or order a symbol, the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index.

Length

Specifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multisymbol output.

Note: To filter or order a symbol, the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index.

Wildcard

This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison. The wildcard character represents the end of matching, and allows for variable lengths of symbol output.

Placeholder

The placeholder character requires a character to be present, but does not compare the data value.

Matching Data

This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering. This data string may also contain wildcard and placeholder characters to facilitate matching. Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data, it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index.

Examples:

• Filter data = “123*”. This will match data strings of “123”, “123456”, and “123ABC”, but not “12”.

• Filter data = “123*AB?C”. This will be interpreted as “123*”.

• Filter data = “123?”. This will match “1234” and “123A”, but not “123”, “12345”, or

“1234C”.

• Filter data = “123?A”. This will match “1234A” and “123BA”, but not “123”, “1234C”, or

“1234ABCD”.

• Filter data = “123?A?”. This will match “1234AB” and “123BAT”, but not “1234A” or

“123BATS”.

• Filter data = “12??*”. This will match “1234”, “123456”, and “123ABC”, but not “12” or

“123”.

• Filter data = “123?A*”. This will match “1234A”, “123BA”, and “123BATS”, but not “1234” or “1234C”.

4-34


Ordered Output Filter Settings

Setup

Double-clicking on a row in the

Ordered Output table brings up the

Ordered Output Filter Settings dialog.

Use these settings to determine

Symbology Type, Length of the symbol, a user-defined Matching

String, ASCII Lookup, Wildcard

Character, Placeholder Character,

Database Number, and Decode

Direction. Click Apply to save the settings to the corresponding filter.


4-35

Ordered Output

Rules for Output Filter Configuration

Output Filter Configuration Rule # 1

Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record. There is an exception to this rule, however, when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters. In such a case, unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions.

For example, if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 5 active filters, the last position can be filled by any (unfiltered) qualified symbol.


The same filter setup can be used multiple times.

For example, filters 1, 2, and 3 can be set up to filter Code 39 symbols, and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded.


All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position. If a symbol matches filter 3, it will be output as the third symbol. If a filter does not have a matching qualified symbol, a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol (assuming the

No Read message is enabled).

For example, if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3’s requirements, then a No Read message will be output in the third output position.

4-36


Setup

Output Format

Enable Output Format

This is a global enable/disable parameter. Use Set Number of Symbols and Output

Phrase to assign symbols for formatting, and Symbol Parse to determine the specific output content for the assigned symbols.

On the Output Format tab, check the Enable Output Format box.


4-37

Output Format

Set Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols determines the number of symbols to which output formatting will apply.

Output Phrase

Output Phrase refers to the user-defined Preamble, selected symbols, and Postamble sequence in the read cycle result.

Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase.

Enter Postamble characters by double-clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator.

Check the

Parse boxes beneath the symbols to be formatted.

Enter Postamble characters by double-clicking in the text field and then using the Postamble calculator.

4-38


Symbol Parse

Extract

Setup

The Extract Range function corresponds to the Start Location and

Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command.

Multiple character sequences can be extracted and inserted using Symbol Parse. In this example, the selected extraction range is characters 2-4. The “Sample Symbol” example on the Symbol

Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired. Simultaneously, the data string from the selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table, followed by the user-defined extracted output.


4-39

Output Format

Insert

The Insert process is very similar to the

Extract process, except that Insert allows the user to enter characters using the Insert calculator (shown above).

4-40

Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table.


Setup

Dynamic Setup

Dynamic Setup is used to calculate image capture timing during a read cycle. Without proper timing, the imager will not be able to decode all symbols in a read cycle. An external trigger is used to activate image captures so the user can make timing adjustments as capture events occur.

Read Rate is represented graphically in real-time as the user makes adjustments to the time delay between image captures.

The user can control Capture #, Number of Captures, and Number of Symbols using these spin boxes.

The Delay Adjustment slider allows the user extremely precise control of the time delays between image captures in a read cycle. Delay values are shown in seconds in the field above the slider. The Coarse and Fine Delay Adjustment options determine whether larger or smaller adjustment increments will be used.


4-41

Dynamic Setup

4-42


5 Parameters

Contents

Communication .............................................................................................................................5-2

Read Cycle .................................................................................................................................5-41

Symbologies ...............................................................................................................................5-61

I/O Parameters............................................................................................................................5-97

Symbol Quality..........................................................................................................................5-159

Matchcode ................................................................................................................................5-166

Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................5-175

This section explains the function and purpose of the Parameters commands in di-soric

ID’s tabbed tree controls.

Important: Unless otherwise specified, command settings shown in this section are the default settings.


5-1

Communication

Communication

Click the App Mode button and then the Parameters button to display the tree control tabs.

Then click the Communication tab to display the Communication tree control.

The

*




To change a setting, double-click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options.

Note: Communication settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal

using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

Communication

section of

Appendix E

.

5-2


Parameters

Port Routing

The ID-06 features a communication system based on Port Routing instead of traditional, dedicated serial ports. Decisions can be made about the direction and content of communication between ports based on different Data Types. Any available port can be used in any combination.

The fundamental concept of Port Routing is that communication design can be based upon Data Types rather than ports. The advantage of this is the ability to map different data types to different ports—the user is no longer limited to a “Host Port” and “Aux Port” for specific types of input and output. Since each port is independent instead of fixed for a particular purpose, the imager behaves more like a data switch.

Standard ID-06

ID-06 C-Mount


5-3

Communication

Port Routing Advantages

• Data can be routed in on one port and out on the same port or a different port like a switch or router.

Transparent Mode

,

Half Duplex Mode

,

Full Duplex Mode

, and

Custom Mode

.

• External Data Routing still follows the “To/From Host/Aux” paradigm. The new capability allows the customer to define the data direction—which port behaves as the “Host Port” and which port behaves as the “Aux Port”.

• Only one daisy chain setup required per system.

• Minimal configuration required for each port, with similar items grouped together.

5-4


Parameters

RS-232 A

The following settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common RS-232 formatting.

Baud Rate

Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings.

The rate at which the imager and host transfer data back and forth.

Parity

Only changed if necessary to match host setting.

An error detection routine in which one data bit per character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is either even or odd.

Stop Bits


One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character.


5-5

Communication

Data Bits



Symbol Data Output

Enables or disables decoded symbol data output from the imager.

Extra Symbol Information

Enables or disables extra symbol information output from the imager.

Diagnostics Output

Enables or disables diagnostics output from the imager.

5-6


Parameters

External Source Processing Mode

Enables or disables processing of commands or data from sources external to the imager.

Command

Command enables command processing in the imager.

Note: Command processing is always enabled for RS-232 A.

Data

Data enables RS-232 A as a data source port.

Note: The data path between in the source port and out the source port is always two-way.

Data is copied from source data ports and all those source ports’ data is transmitted to the destination port, and from the destination port to the source port.


5-7

Communication

RS-232 B


Baud Rate



Parity



Stop Bits



5-8


Parameters

Data Bits










5-9

Communication



Command


Data

Data enables RS-232 B as a data source port.



5-10


Parameters

RS-422


Baud Rate



Parity



Stop Bits




5-11

Communication

Data Bits









5-12


Parameters



Command


Data

Data enables RS-422 as a data source port.




5-13

Communication

Ethernet

Enables or disables Ethernet connectivity in the imager.

Important: For further information about setting up TCP/IP with a PC, see

Configuring

Ethernet TCP/IP

.

5-14


IP Address

Enter the IP address of the imager in this field.

Parameters


5-15

Communication

Subnet

Enter the Subnet address of the imager in this field.

5-16


Gateway

Enter the Gateway address of the imager in this field.

Parameters


5-17

Communication

IP Address Mode

Determines how the imager’s IP address will be defined.

Static

In Static Mode, the imager uses the user-defined IP address entered in di-soric ID.

DHCP

In DHCP Mode, the imager automatically acquires the IP address, Subnet, and Gateway addresses from a DHCP or BOOTP server.

5-18


Parameters

TCP Port 1

One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager. The default setting is 2001.

Symbol Data Output


Extra Symbol Information


Diagnostics Output


External Source Processing Mode


Command


Data

Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 1 as a data source port.




5-19

Communication

TCP Port 2

One of two TCP ports for Ethernet communication with the imager. The default setting is 2003.



Extra Symbol Information


Diagnostics Output


External Source Processing Mode


Command


Data

Data enables Ethernet TCP Port 2 as a data source port.



5-20


Parameters

Search and Configure Mode

Search and Configure Mode is intended primarily for initial setup of a ID-06 in a network.

This parameter controls whether or not the ID-06 will respond to di-soric ID’s Search function in the Ethernet TCP/IP connect dialog section of the


:

After the ID-06 is in full use in an application, you may want the imager to continue to appear in the Search response list for future searches. This can help prevent disruption of the system that may occur is di-soric ID were to show only unconfigured units.

Changes to this parameter are saved to NOVRAM and are set to default on power on.

A Reset

<A>

is required for settings to take effect.

Important: Once this setting is Disabled, di-soric ID will only be able to connect to the imager if you know the IP address and enter it in the IP Address field of the Ethernet TCP/IP connect dialog. Search and Configure Mode can be re-enabled by defaulting the ID-06.

Enabled

When enabled, Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed.

Timed Window

When Timed Window is selected, Search and Configure Mode will find the imager and settings can be changed, but only 60 seconds from the last reset. After 60 seconds,

Search and Configure Mode will be disabled.


5-21

Communication

Protocol Selection

In general, the point-to-point protocols will work well in most applications. They require no address and must use RS-232 or RS-422 communication standards.

Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the imager and the host, or in the case of Multidrop, between the imagers and a concentrator.

Note: In all protocol modes, the Preamble and Postamble character strings can be used

to frame the decoded data, and both are included in calculating the

LRC

(Longitudinal

Redundancy Check).

5-22


Parameters

Protocol Options

Point-to-Point (Standard)

Used only with RS-232 or RS-422.

Standard Point-to-Point requires no address and sends the data to the host whenever it is available, without a request or handshake from the host.

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS

A scanner initiates a data transfer with an RTS (request-to-send) transmission. The host, when ready, responds with a CTS (clear-to-send) and the data is transmitted. RTS and

CTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS-232 standard.

Used only with RS-232.

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS (request-to-send/clear-to-send) is a simple hardware handshake protocol that allows a scanner to initiate data transfers to the host.

Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF

If an XOFF has been received from the host, data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON. During the XOFF phase, the host is free to carry on other chores and accept data from other devices. Used only with RS-232.

This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start (

^Q

) or stop (

^S

).

Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF

Used only with RS-232.

This option is a combination of Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and Point-to-Point with

XON/XOFF.

ACK/NAK

See

ACK / NAK Options

.

Polling Mode

See

Polling Mode Options

.


5-23

Communication

Address

The Protocol Address can be any number between 1 and 50.

Protocol Port

RS-232 A or RS-422 can be used as Protocol Ports.

5-24


Parameters

ACK / NAK Options

These parameters take effect for ACK/NAK on the main RS-232 or RS-422 ports (not on the Auxiliary Port), and are completely independent of the Polling Mode Options.

The imager always follows the protocol in both directions (to and from the host). There is no option to disable it from either direction.

RES-NAK Defaults

RES: (Reset)

REQ: (Request)

STX: (Start of Text)

ETX: (End of Text)

ACK: (Acknowledge)

NAK: (Negative Acknowledge)

NUL (0x00)

NUL (0x00)

NUL (0x00)

NUL (0x00)

ACK (0x06)

NAK (0x15)


5-25

Communication

ACK/NAK Protocol

The following are general outlines of the ACK/NAK protocol. Items that are framed by brackets ( [ ] ) can either be disabled or enabled. LRC does not include STX, but it does include preamble, postamble, and ETX.


TX to host: [STX] [preamble] SYMBOL DATA [postamble] [ETX] [LRC]

Response from host: ACK/NAK. Sent when LRC, ETX, postamble, or timeout (waiting for more data) are detected (if REQ is disabled) depending on what is enabled.

Commands from Host to Imager

TX to Imager: [STX] <command> [ETX] [LRC]

Response from Imager: ACK/NAK. Sent when LRC, ETX, or command-ending angle bracket ‘>’ are received, depending on what is enabled.

Command Response from Imager to Host

TX to host: [STX] [preamble] COMMAND RESPONSE DATA [postamble] [ETX] [LRC]

Response from host: ACK/NAK. Sent when LRC, ETX, postamble, command-ending angle bracket ‘>’, or timeout (waiting for more data) are detected, depending on what is enabled.

As with Polling Mode

<K140,5>

, the imager can optionally perform the REQ and RES event sequences in ACK/NAK mode. If the sender does not receive an ACK or NAK, it will send REQ to request such a response (if enabled). When the sender receives an ACK, too many NAKs, or times out (if already enabled), it will send a RES (if enabled) to terminate the transaction.

Note: See

ACK/NAK Data Flow Examples

in Appendix F for sample ACK/NAK communication scenarios.

5-26


Parameters

Polling Mode Options

These parameters only take effect for Polling Mode

<K140,5>

on the main RS-232 or

RS-422 ports (not on the Auxiliary Port), and are completely independent of the ACK/NAK

Options

<K147>

.

The values of protocol characters can be changed, but the protocol events cannot be disabled. The polling mode address is configured in the

<K140>

command.

To enable true multidrop protocol, the RS422/485 port must be enabled,

<K102,1>

, in order to turn the transmitter on and off. If RS-232 is enabled instead of RS422/485,

<K102,0>

, then Polling Mode will operate as a Point-to-Point polling protocol. This is because the RS-232 transmitter is always left on when enabled.

Note: See

ACK/NAK Data Flow Examples

in Appendix F for sample Polling Mode

communication scenarios.

RES-NAK Defaults

RES: (Reset)

REQ: (Request)





EOT (0x04)

ENQ (0x05)

STX (0x02)

ETX (0x03)

ACK (0x06)

NAK (0x15)


5-27

Communication

Response Timeout

Only used when a response is required from the host. While in Multidrop, if the imager does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data, it will act on a fault. The imager can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero.

The time that the imager will wait before timing out if ACK, NAK, and ETX are enabled, and a host response is expected.

5-28


Parameters

LRC Status

Used when extra data integrity is required.

An error-checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions. It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX (start of text) up to and including the ETX (end of text).

What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmission are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 (two 1s = 0, two 0s = 0, a 1 and a 0 = 1). The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission, and the receiver (usually the host) performs the same addition and compares the results.


5-29

Communication

External Data Routing

External Data Routing settings configure the global operation of all external data port settings.

External Data Routing Options

Transparent Mode

When Transparent Mode is enabled, the following conditions apply:

Symbol Data to Source = Fixed to Enabled

Ambles to Source = Fixed to Disabled

Echo to Source = Fixed to Enabled

Output at End of Read Cycle = Fixed to Enabled

Output at ETX = Fixed to Enabled with user-defined characters. Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.

Output at Timeout = Fixed to Enabled with user-defined timeout. Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.

5-30


Parameters

Mode of Operation

• Source Port data will echo back to itself.

• Source Port data will always pass through even when the Destination Port is in Polling

Mode with the host.

• Whenever ETX is received on the Source Port or symbol data is generated, the data will be send to the Destination Port with its data appearing between the Preamble and symbol data.

• Source Port data will always be sent to the Destination Port with a Preamble and Postamble.

• Symbol data will be sent to the Source Port on a good read without Preamble or Postamble in Point-to-Point protocol even if the Destination Port is in Polling Mode with the host.

• Destination Port data always echoes to the Source Port even if the Destination Port is in

Polling Mode.


5-31

Communication

Half Duplex Mode

When Half Duplex Mode is enabled, the following conditions apply:

Symbol Data to Source = Fixed to Enabled

Ambles to Source = Fixed to Enabled

Echo to Source = Fixed to Disabled

Output at End of Read Cycle = Fixed to Disabled

Output at ETX = Fixed to Disabled with user-defined characters. Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.

Output at Timeout = Fixed to Disabled with user-defined timeout. Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.


• Source Port data is not echoed back to itself.

• Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode.

• Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received.

• Source Port data is sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble.

• Symbol data is sent to the Source Port and the Destination Port at the same time, and conforms to the communication parameters.

• Destination Port data is echoed to the Source Port in an un-polled mode.

5-32


Parameters

Full Duplex Mode

When Full Duplex Mode is enabled, the following conditions apply:

Symbol Data to Source = Fixed to Disabled

Ambles to Source = Fixed to Disabled

Echo to Source = Fixed to Disabled

Output at End of Read Cycle = Fixed to Disabled

Output at ETX = Fixed to Disabled with user-defined characters. Default character will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.

Output at Timeout = Fixed to Disabled with user-defined timeout. Default time will be used if this setting is set to Disabled.


• Source Port data is not echoed back to itself.

• Source Port data is ignored when the Destination Port is in Polling Mode.

• Source Port data or symbol data is sent to the Destination Port whenever it is received.

• Source Port data is always sent to the Destination Port without a Preamble or Postamble.

• Symbol data is not sent to the Source Port.

• Destination port data is echoed to the source port in an un-polled mode.

Custom Mode

Custom allows for user-defined communication (Ambles to Source, Echo to Source, Output at End of Read Cycle, Output at ETX, Output at Timeout).


5-33

Communication

Destination Port

Determines the port to which data will be sent.

Ambles to Source

Enables or Disables the ability to send Preambles and Postambles to the Source port.

Echo to Source

Enables or Disables the ability to send an Echo to the Source port.

Output at End of Read Cycle

Enables or Disables the ability to output data at the end of read cycle.

5-34


Output at ETX

Determines the output at ETX.

Output at Timeout

Determines the Timeout value for output.

Parameters


5-35

Communication

Array Communication Modes

Mode

Source

Defines the communication port.

4.

5-36


Parameters

Preamble

Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line.

Preamble Characters

Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data


5-37

Communication

Postamble

Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data. For example, defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed on its own line.

Postamble Characters

Allows the user to define up to four postamble characters that can be added to the end of the decoded data.

5-38


Parameters

Read Cycle


Then click the Read Cycle tab to display the Read Cycle tree control.

The

*





Note: Read Cycle settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

Read Cycle

section of

Appendix E

.


5-39

Read Cycle

Read Cycle Setup

Setting up read cycle and triggering parameters involves a series of decisions based on the particular application, as follows:

1. Select the number of symbols to be read in a single cycle.

2. Decide on the trigger type to be used: if serial, choose a serial character; if external,

choose either

External Level

or

External Edge

.

3. Designate how the read cycle should end (

Timeout

,

New Trigger

).

5-40


Parameters

Multisymbol

Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number, quantity, etc. This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols.

Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 100 symbols that can be read in a single read cycle.

The following conditions apply:

• The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 3,000 for all symbols.

• All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string, unless output filtering is enabled.

• If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time, symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance.

• If

Matchcode Type

is set to

Sequential

or if

Trigger

is set to

Continuous Read 1 Output

,

the imager will behave as if Number of Symbols were set to 1, regardless of the user-defined configuration.

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle.

Multisymbol Separator

Multisymbol Separator is used to delimit or separate data fields with a user-defined character.

The Multisymbol Separator can be any valid ASCII character, inserted between each symbol read when Number of Symbols is set to any number greater than 1.


5-41

Read Cycle

Trigger

The Trigger is the event that initiates a read cycle.

Note: When calibrating the imager or testing read rate, the current trigger setting will be disregarded.

Trigger Mode

Continuous Read

Continuous Read is useful in testing symbol readability or imager functions. It is not recommended for normal operations.

In Continuous Read, trigger input options are disabled, the imager is always in the read cycle, and it will attempt to decode and transmit data for every symbol. If a single symbol stays within read range for multiple read cycles, its data will be transmitted repeatedly until it leaves the read range.

The imager sends replies to serial commands that require responses when symbol data is transmitted, or read cycle timeout is enabled and a timeout occurs. Depending on the combination of enabled symbologies and the Threshold Mode setting, the imager may take longer than the timeout to process symbol data.

Note: When to Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read.

5-42


Parameters

Continuous Read 1 Output

Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information. It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand.

In Continuous Read 1 Output the imager self-triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs.

If

End of Read Cycle Mode

is set to

Timeout

and the symbol doesn’t change, the output

is repeated at the end of each timeout period. For example, if Timeout is set to one second, the imager sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol remains in the field of view.

If


is set to

New Trigger

, the imager will send the current symbol

data immediately, but only once. A new symbol appearing in the imager’s range will be read and sent immediately, provided it is not identical to the previous symbol.

Caution: In automated environments, Continuous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is typically no reliable way to verify that a symbol was missed.

Note: If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output, the imager will behave as if


were set to 1, regardless of the user-defined configuration.


5-43

Read Cycle

External Level

Initiate Read Cycle:

Object #1, moving in front of the detector beam, causes a change in the trigger state, which initiates the read cycle.

End Read Cycle:

The same object, moving out of the detector beam, causes another change in the trigger state, which ends the read cycle.

This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the imager spends reading each object is not predictable. It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred.

External Level allows the read cycle (active state) to begin when a trigger (change of state) from an external sensing device is received. The read cycle persists until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again.

Important: Level and Edge apply to the active logic state (Negative or Positive) that exists while the object is in a read cycle, between the rising edge and the falling edge.

Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object. Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object. This applies both to External Level and External Edge.

External Edge

Initiate Read Cycle:

Object # 1, moving in front of the detector beam, causes a change in the trigger state, which initiates the read cycle.

Initiate Second Read Cycle:

Object # 2, moving in front of the detector beam, causes another change in the trigger state. This signal initiates a new read cycle and ends the previous read cycle unless

Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occured.

This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant, or if spacing, object size, or read cycle timeouts are consistent.

External Edge, as with Level, allows the read cycle (active state) to begin when a trigger

(change of state) from an external sensing device is received. However, the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle. The read cycle ends with a good read output, or, depending on the


setting, a timeout or new

trigger occurs.

5-44


Parameters

Serial Data

Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view. It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred.

In Serial Data, the imager accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle. A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an

External Edge

trigger.

Serial commands are entered inside angle brackets, as shown here:

<n>

.

Note: In Serial Data, sending a non-delimited start serial character will start a read cycle; however, a non-delimited stop serial character has no effect.

Serial Data and Edge

Serial Data and Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be triggered manually.

An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the auxiliary port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the imager to the host.

In this mode the imager accepts either a serial ASCII character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle.

Note: In Serial Data, sending a non-delimited start serial character will start a read cycle; however, a non-delimited stop serial character has no effect.

Trigger Filter Duration

Note: Trigger filter ranges from 32.0 μs to 2.10 seconds.

Leading Edge

Used to ignore accidental triggers when

Trigger Mode

is set to

External Edge

or

External Level

.

To consider a change in state on the trigger input, the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration. In an edge mode, the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration. In a level mode, the leading edge is filtered such that on an active edge, the state must be held interrupted for the trigger filter duration before a trigger will occur.

Note: 313 = ~10ms.


5-45

Read Cycle

Trailing Edge

Used to ignore accidental triggers when

Trigger Mode

is set to

External Edge

or

External Level

.

To consider a change in state on the trigger input, the level must be stable for the trigger filter duration. In an edge mode, the imager will trigger a read cycle if the active state has been uninterrupted for the entire trigger filter duration. In a level mode, the trailing edge is filtered such that on the falling edge, the state must be held for the trigger filter duration before the trigger will be deemed inactive.

Note: 313 = ~10ms.

External Trigger State

Allows users to select the trigger polarity that will be used in their application.

Determines the active state of the trigger signal applied to the cable input of the imager.

5-46


Parameters

Serial Trigger

Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle.

A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands. It must be entered within angle bracket delimiters

<

and

>

or, in the case of non-delimited triggers, it must define individual start and stop characters.

Character (Delimited)

Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle.

A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle.

A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as

<

and

>

.

Note:

Serial Data

or

Serial Data and Edge

trigger mode must be enabled for Serial

Trigger Character to function.


5-47

Read Cycle

Start Character (Non-Delimited)

Useful in applications where different characters are required to start a read cycle.

A single ASCII host serial trigger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as

<

and

>

.

Non-delimited Start characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event.

When defining Start trigger characters, the following rules apply:

• In

External Edge

the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any

Stop trigger character that may be defined.

• In

External Level

the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger

character ends it. Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted, the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received.

• In


trigger mode, either a Start trigger character or a hardware

trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle.

5-48


Parameters

Stop Character (Non-Delimited)

Useful in applications where different characters are required to end a read cycle.

A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as

<

and

>

.

Non-delimited Stop characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event.

When defining Stop trigger characters, the following rules apply:

• In

External Edge

the imager looks only for the Start trigger character and ignores any

Stop trigger character that may be defined.

• In

External Level

the Start trigger character begins the read cycle and the Stop trigger

character ends it. Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted, the imager remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received.

• In


trigger mode, either a Start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle.


5-49

Read Cycle

Decodes Before Output

Decodes Before Output specifies the number of times a symbol needs to be decoded before symbol data is output and a good read is declared.

5-50


Parameters

End of Read Cycle

The read cycle is the time during which the imager will attempt to decode a symbol. A read cycle can be ended by a timeout or a new trigger, or a combination of the two.


Note: When operating in

Continuous Read

or


, the imager is

always in the read cycle.

Timeout

Typically used with


and


.

It is effective in highly controlled applications when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted. It assures that a read cycle ends before the next symbol appears, giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host.

Timeout ends the read cycle, causing the imager to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses (times out), if

When to Output Symbol Data

is set to

End of Read Cycle

.

If in Continuous Read 1 Output, a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again.

With

External Edge

,

Serial Data

, or Serial Data and Edge enabled, a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host.

With

External Level

enabled, the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger occurs or a timeout occurs. The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger.


5-51

Read Cycle

New Trigger

New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the imager at irregular intervals (not timing-dependent).

New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs. New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger.

With

External Edge

,

Serial Data

, or


enabled, an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle.

In the case of External Level, a falling edge trigger ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger.

Timeout or New Trigger

Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle. For example, if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular.

Timeout or New Trigger is identical to

Timeout

except that a timeout or a new trigger

(whichever occurs first) ends the read cycle.

Last Frame

Useful in applications in which the timeout duration varies.

Last Frame or New Trigger

Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new object could appear before the last frame in the sequence.

Last Frame or New Trigger is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame (whichever occurs first) ends the read cycle.

Read Cycle Timeout

Read Cycle Timeout determines the duration of the read cycle.

5-52


Parameters

Capture Mode

Capture mode specifies how multiple captures are taken and managed throughout a read cycle.

Rapid Capture

In a rapid capture mode one or multiple captures can taken at an interval specified by the time delay between captures parameter. In this mode the only limiting time factor is the integration and transfer timing.

Continuous Capture

In continuous capture mode captures are continually taken throughout the read cycle in a multi-buffered format so that we start processing the first image while we are capturing the second. Continuous capture mode will override the pre-processing field; this improves performance in the multi-buffered format. This mode operation as laser scanners have historically operated, with captures spanning the entire read cycle duration until an exit condition occurs such as qualification or timeout.

Number of Captures

Specifies the number of captures to process in the rapid capture mode. This parameter is used in conjunction with the time delay between captures parameters to specify the capture sequence of a rapid capture read cycle.

Rapid Capture Mode


5-53

Read Cycle

Timed Capture

Capture events are controlled by the timing values entered in the “Capture Time” command.

Triggered Capture

When set to trigger captures mode the imager operates in the following manner:

• The number of captures represents the number of triggers expected from the system per read cycle. The first trigger enters the read cycle.

• Subsequent triggers initiate captures in the read cycle up to the number of captures is met or the end of read cycle condition is met. Any additional triggers between reaching the number of captures and meeting the end of read cycle requirements will be ignored.

• If the read cycle is fully qualified prior to reaching the number of captures and the symbol output is set to ASAP, the symbol data will be output and all post processing (Logic outputs, video, etc.) will finish but the imager will remain in the read cycle. When enough triggers come in to satisfy the number of captures setting or a timeout expires, the imager will exit the read cycle. This operation would be synonymous with level triggered read cycle waiting for the trigger to fall.

• If the end of read cycle is set for new trigger and the read cycle qualifications have not been met, the read cycle will exit upon receiving the first trigger after reaching the number of captures setting. At this time the post processing from the read cycle will complete and a new read cycle will begin.

5-54


Parameters

Capture Time

This command specifies the frame delays associated with the frames captured in a rapid capture mode of operation.

Time Before 1st Capture

This value specifies the delay from the trigger to the first capture of any triggered read cycle.

Time Between Captures 1-2

This value specifies the delay to wait before starting a frame capture for the next capture in the rapid capture sequence.










5-55

Read Cycle





Notes for Rapid Capture, Timed Capture

If rapid capture is configured for timed captures this delay is measured from the point at which the previous delay expired. If the delay expires during a previous capture the start of the capture will occur as soon as the previous capture or captures complete. For example, if rapid capture is configured for 8 captures and all delays are configured for zero all 8 captures will occur back to back as fast as the imager is able.

Notes for Rapid Capture, Triggered Capture

If rapid capture is configured for triggered captures mode the delay taken is measured from the point at which the trigger for that capture is received. Also if an incoming trigger occurs before a previous delay has expired, the previous capture is initiated and the delay for the incoming trigger is started.

Important:

If the unit is triggered to capture more than 8 images the unit will repeat the last delay (8th) for the remaining frames.

5-56


Parameters

Store No Read Image

Image storage allows the user to store images from separate read cycles and has the ability to retrieve them later. The number of available slots for storage depends on the mode of operation. If functioning in the rapid capture mode the number of images available

to store is the maximum

Number of Captures

– the current setting for number of captures.

If the user is operating in a continuous capture mode then they can store up to the maximum number of captures – 3.

Image Storage Type

Disabled / Clear

Upon selection, all saved images will be cleared, and the unit will not store images for later retrieving.

Store on No Read

The unit will store an image upon exiting the read cycle that retrieved a later time. If multiple captures are present during the duration of a read cycle the image stored will be the last image processed for the read cycle. This image is stored in RAM and can be retrieved as long as power is applied and the unit has not been reset via reset/save sequences. Other commands that can initialize the storage RAM are ones that changed capture modes or put the unit in a test capture mode.

Image Storage Mode

First Image

In this mode the image storage will store images until the available image memory has been filled. At this point the unit will stop saving additional images. In this mode you will always have the first images that were stored.

Last Image

In this mode the image storage will continue to store images after the available memory has been filled by purging the oldest image in the storage memory. In this mode you will always have the last images that were stored.


5-57

Read Cycle

Image Processing Settings

Number of Symbols in Field of View

Any Number of Symbols

No limit on number of symbols attempted to decode in an image frame.

One Symbol

Only one symbol will be decoded in an image frame, and this will be regardless of any qualifying attributes associated with the read cycle.

Image Processing Timeout

Specifies the maximum amount of time allowed for image processing to spend on a captured image. When the time-out expires, the image processing is aborted. This time-out works in both rapid capture and continuous capture modes, as well as with the configuration database.

Notes:

The time-out period does not include capture time.

If a time-out occurs the image will be recorded as a No Read. This may cause some confusion because the image may decode fine given enough time.

5-58


Parameters

Symbologies


Then click the Symbologies tab to display the Symbologies tree control.



The

*


To change a setting,

double-click the setting and use the cursor to scroll through the options.

Note: Symbologies settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

Symbologies

section of

Appendix E

.


5-59

Symbologies

Data Matrix

ECC 200 Status

Disabled

The imager will not attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols.

Enabled

The imager will attempt to decode ECC 200 symbols.

ECC 000 Status

Disabled


Enabled


ECC 050 Status

Disabled


Enabled


ECC 080 Status

Disabled


Enabled


5-60


ECC 100 Status

Disabled


Enabled


ECC 140 Status

Disabled


Enabled


ECC 120 Status

Disabled


Enabled


ECC 130 Status

Disabled


Enabled


Parameters


5-61

Symbologies

QR Code

Disabled

The imager will not attempt to decode QR Code symbols.

Enabled

The imager will attempt to decode QR Code symbols.

5-62


Micro QR Code

Disabled

The imager will not attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols.

Enabled

The imager will attempt to decode Micro QR Code symbols.

Parameters


5-63

Symbologies

Code 39

Code 39 is considered the standard for non-retail 1D symbology.

An alphanumeric symbology with unique start/stop code patterns, composed of 9 black and white elements per character, of which 3 are wide.

Check Character Status

Enables or Disables the check character.

Check Character Output Status

Check Character Output Status, when added to the symbol, provides additional data security.

When enabled, the check character character is read and compared along with the symbol data. When disabled, symbol data is sent without the check character.

Note: With Check Character Output Status enabled and an

External Edge

,

External

Level

, or

Serial Data

trigger option enabled, an invalid check character calculation will

cause a

No Read Message

to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle.

Large Intercharacter Gap

Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification.

When enabled, the imager can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times (3x) the narrow element width.

Important: Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow or Narrow, Enhanced

Quiet Zone enabled, because a large intercharacter gap (over 3x) could cause a narrow quiet zone (5x) to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap.

5-64


Parameters

Fixed Symbol Length Status

When enabled, the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. If disabled, any length will be considered valid.

Fixed Symbol Length

Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize (this does not include start and stop and check character characters). The imager ignores any symbology that does not match the specified length.

Full ASCII Set

Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set (0-9, A-Z, etc.)

The user must know in advance whether or not to use the Full ASCII Set option. Since

Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character, it is less efficient.

Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters; zero through nine, capital “A” through capital

“Z”, minus symbol, plus symbol, forward slash, space, decimal point, dollar sign, and percent symbol. When Full ASCII Set is enabled, the imager can read the full ASCII character set, from 0 to 255.


5-65

Symbologies

Code 128

Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with limited space and high-security requirements.

A very dense alphanumeric symbology. It encodes all 128 ASCII characters, it is continuous, has variable length, and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge.


When enabled, the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. If disabled, any length will be considered a valid symbol.

Symbol Length

Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

This specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize (this does not include start, stop, and check character characters). The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length.

5-66


Parameters

EAN Status

When this field is disabled, the imager will not check any Code 128 labels for conformance to EAN requirements, or perform any special formatting.

When enabled, the imager can read symbols with or without a function 1 character in the first position. If a symbol has a function 1 character in the first position, it must conform to

EAN format. Symbols that conform to EAN format will also be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command.

If EAN status is required, the imager will only decode symbols that have a function 1 character in the first position and that conform to EAN format. All symbols read will be subject to the special output formatting options available in this command.

Note: Code 128 status must be enabled for EAN status to be active.

Output Format

In Standard, the imager will not apply special EAN output formatting options.

In Application, the imager will apply the special EAN output formatting options to decoded EAN-conforming symbols.


5-67

Symbologies

Application Record Separator Status

When enabled, an EAN separator will be inserted into the output between fields whenever an EAN-conforming symbol is decoded and EAN output formatting applies.

Application Record Separator Character

This is an ASCII character that serves as an EAN separator in formatted EAN output.

Application Record Brackets

If an EAN-conforming symbol is decoded and EAN formatting applies, this feature places bracket characters around the application identifiers in the formatted output.

Application Record Padding

This feature causes the imager to pad variable-length application fields with leading zeroes. This is not done for the last field of a symbol.

5-68


BC412


Disabled

The imager will strip the verified check digit from the symbol data.

Enabled

The imager will format the verified check digit as part of the symbol data.

Parameters


Disabled

The imager will accept any length BC412 symbol as valid.

Enabled

The imager will reject any BC412 symbol that does not match the fixed code length value for BC412.


The code length used to validate BC-412 symbols if the fixed code length status is set to enabled.


5-69

Symbologies

Interleaved 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5 has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length; however, di-soric does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as symbol truncation.

A dense, contimuous, self-checking, numeric symbology. Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements, two wide and three narrow, representing numbers

0 through 9, with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character. (A check character is highly recommended).

Check Character Status

This option is not typically used, but it can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check character verification.

An error correcting routine in which the check character character is added.


When enabled, a check character character is sent along with the symbol data for added data security.

5-70


Parameters

Symbol Length 1

Useful in applications where Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols of a specific length are required.

The Symbol Length 1 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it.

Important: If

Range Mode Status

is set to Disabled, the length of the symbol must match

either Symbol Length 1 or Symbol Length 2 to be considered a valid symbol.

If


is set to Enabled, Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid.

Symbol Length 2


The Symbol Length 2 field is one of two fields against which the decoded symbol is compared before accepting it as valid or rejecting it.

Important: If


is set to Disabled, the length of the symbol must match

either Symbol Length 2 or Symbol Length 1 to be considered a valid symbol.

If


is set to Enabled, Symbol Length 2 and Symbol Length 1 form a range into which the length of the symbol must fall to be considered valid.

Guard Bar

Note: Whenever Guard Bar is enabled, the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place.

Useful when Interleaved 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output. This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols.

A guard bar is a heavy bar, at least twice the width of the wide bar, surrounding the printed

Interleaved 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads.


5-71

Symbologies


Important: Unless Range Mode is enabled, Symbol Length must be set to decode

Interleaved 2 of 5 symbols.


When Range Mode is disabled, the imager checks the value of the symbol length against the values set in Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2. If the symbol length does not match either of the preset values, then it is rejected as invalid.

When Range Mode is enabled, Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are combined to form a range of valid symbol lengths. Any symbol length that does not fall into this range is rejected as an invalid symbol. Either of the preset symbol length values in the Symbol

Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 fields can form the start or end of the range.

5-72


Parameters

Codabar

Used in photo-finishing and library applications. Previously used in medical applications, but not typically used in newer medical applications.

Codabar is a 16-bit character set (0 through 9, and the characters $, :, /, ., +, and –) with start/stop codes and at least two distinctly different bar widths.

Start and Stop Match Status

When disabled, the imager will decode Codabar symbols whether or not the start and stop characters are the same.

When enabled, the imager will not decode Codabar symbols unless the start and stop characters are the same.

Start and Stop Output Status

When disabled, the start and stop characters will not be present in the data output of the decoded symbol.

When enabled, the start and stop characters will be present in the data output of the decoded symbol.

Note: Because the start and stop characters are included as part of the data, the characters must be included as part of the length in a fixed length mode of operation.


5-73

Symbologies

Large Intercharacter Gap

When disabled, the spaces between characters, or the “intercharacter gap”, are ignored during the decode process.

Note: If the intercharacter space is large enough to be considered a margin, the symbol will not decode, regardless of this parameter’s setting.


When disabled, the imager will accept any Codabar symbol provided it doesn’t exceed the system’s maximum capabilities.

When enabled, the imager will reject any Codabar symbol that doesn’t match the fixed length.

Symbol Length

This is the value against which all Codabar symbol lengths will be compared.

Check Character Type

When disabled, the imager will not perform any character checking calculations on decoded Codabar symbols.

When set to Mod 16, the imager will perform a modulus 16 check character calculation on the symbol. If the symbol does not pass this calculation, it will not be decoded.

When set to NW 7, the imager will perform an NW7 modulus 11 check character calculation on the symbol. If the symbol does not pass this calculation, it will not be decoded.

When set to Both, the imager will perform both the Mod 16 and NW7 modulus 11 check character calculations on the symbol. If the symbol does not pass either calculation, it will not be decoded.

5-74


Parameters


When this field is disabled and a check character calculation is enabled, the imager will strip the verified check character from the symbol data output. This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used.

When enabled, the imager will output the check character as part of the symbol data. This condition must be accounted for if a fixed length is also being used.


5-75

Symbologies

UPC/EAN

Used primarily in point-of-sale applications in the retail industry. It is commonly used with di-

soric imagers in applications in combination with

Matchcode

when there is a need to verify

that the right product is being placed in the right packaging.

UPC (Universal Product Code) is a fixed length, numeric, continuous symbology. UPC can have two- or five-digit supplemental data following the normal symbol. The UPC Version

A (UPC, A) symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number. The first digit is the number system character, the next five are the manufacturer number, the next five are the product number, and the last digit is the checksum character.

When enabled, the imager will read UPC Version A and UPC Version E only.

EAN Status

EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European retail applications.

Note: UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect.

EAN is a subset of UPC. When enabled, the imager will read UPC Version A, UPC Version

E, EAN 13, and EAN 8. It also appends a leading zero to UPC Version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits. If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC Version A symbols is not desired, disable EAN.

Note: The extra character identifies the country of origin.

5-76


Parameters

Supplementals Status

Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation.

A supplemental is a 2 to 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol. When set to

Enabled or Required, the imager reads supplemental code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes.

Disabled

UPC Supplementals will not be decoded.

Enabled

When enabled, the imager will try to decode a main and a supplemental. However, if a supplemental is not decoded, the main will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle.

Required

When set to Required, both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results.

For example, if Supplementals is set to Required, Separator is enabled, and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character. Then the data is displayed as:

MAIN * SUPPLEMENTAL.

Note: Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol.

Note: If additional symbols—other than the main or supplemental—will be read in the

same read cycle,


should be set accordingly.

Separator Status

Allows users to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols.

A character can be inserted between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required.


5-77

Symbologies

Separator Character

As required by the application.

Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character.

Note: Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma (

,

) sending a command from di-soric ID’s Terminal will return the current settings, including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma.

<K473,s?>

Supplementals Type

As required by symbology used in application.

Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements, or both.

Both

Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid.

Two Digits

Only two character supplementals will be considered valid.

Five Digits

Only five character supplementals will be considered valid.

5-78


Parameters

UPC-E as UPC-A

When disabled, the imager will output the version E symbols in their encoded 6-character format.

When enabled, the imager will format the symbol as either a 12-character UPC-A symbol or an EAN-13 symbol, depending on the state of the EAN status parameter. This formatting reverses the zero suppression that is used to generate the symbol in the UPC specification.


5-79

Symbologies

Code 93

Used in some clinical applications.

Code 93 is a variable-length, continuous symbology employing four element widths. Each

Code 93 character has nine modules that may be either black or white. Each character contains three bars and three spaces.


When disabled, the imager will accept any Code 93 symbol provided is doesn’t exceed the system’s maximum capabilities.

When enabled, the imager will reject any Code 93 symbol that doesn’t match the fixed symbol length.


This is the symbol length value against which all Code 93 symbols will be compared.

5-80


Parameters

Pharmacode

Used mostly in pharmaceutical packaging.

Encodes up to five different numbers, each with its own color, which may be entered in decimal or “binary” format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar. Bar width is independent of height.

In decimal format, each part can be up to 999,999.

In binary format, each input can have up to 19 ones and zeros.

Important: When Pharmacode is enabled, other linear symbologies will not decode properly.

Disable Pharmacode before reading other linear symbologies.


When enabled, the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field. If disabled, any length will be considered valid.

Symbol Length

Specifies the exact number of bars that must be present for the imager to recognize and decode the Pharmacode symbol.

Minimum Bars

Sets the minimum number of bars that a Pharmacode symbol must have to be considered valid.


5-81

Symbologies

Bar Width Status

If set to Mixed, the imager will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars. If set to All Narrow, all bars will be considered as narrow bars. If set to All Wide, all bars will be considered as wide bars. If set to Fixed Threshold, it will use the fixed threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide. The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the imager is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars.

Direction

Specifies the direction in which a symbol can be read.

Fixed Threshold Value

Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold. Defines the minimum difference in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar.

Background Color

Specifies whether the symbol will be presented on a black background or a white background.

5-82


Parameters

Postal Symbologies

Important: Postal Symbologies must have a pixels-per-element value of no more than 7 to be decoded reliably by the ID-06.

The imager must be configured to specific read range, field of view, and camera parameters before decoding Postal Symbologies.

Position the postal symbol in the center of the imager’s field of view.


5-83

Symbologies

Postal Symbology Type

1D Postal Symbologies are used in mail sortation, auditing, certified mail, registered mail, metered mail, and point-of-sale (POS) applications.

This commend determines the postal symbology that will be decoded by the imager.

U.S. Postal (POSTNET, PLANET, USPS4CB)

When U.S. Postal is enabled, the imager will only decode POSTNET, PLANET, and

USPS4CB symbols.

Important: POSTNET Status, PLANET Status, and USPS4CB Status are enabled by default. However, if any of the three U.S. Postal symbologies is set to disabled individually, symbols of that type will not be decoded by the imager even when U.S. Postal is enabled.

For example, if U.S. Postal is enabled but POSTNET Status is disabled, POSTNET symbols will not be decoded by the imager.

See

POSTNET Status

,

PLANET Status

and

USPS4CB Status

for more detail about U.S.

Postal symbologies.

Australia Post

When Australia Post is enabled, the imager will only decode Australia Post symbols.

Japan Post

When Japan Post is enabled, the imager will only decode Japan Post symbols.

Royal Mail

When Royal Mail is enabled, the imager will only decode Royal Mail symbols.

KIX

When KIX is enabled, the imager will only decode KIX symbols.

UPU

When UPU is enabled, the imager will decode UPU symbols and any U.S. Postal symbologies that might be enabled.

For example, if Postal Symbology Type is set to UPU and POSTNET Status is enabled and, the imager will attempt to decode both UPU and POSTNET symbols.

5-84


Parameters

POSTNET Status

POSTNET is used by the United States Postal Service to direct mail. The ZIP Code or

ZIP+4 Code is encoded in the symbol. Data is encoded in half-height and full-height bars, making POSTNET a “2-state” symbology. The delivery point (usually the last two digits of the address or post office box number) is also typically encoded in POSTNET symbols.

If U.S. Postal and POSTNET Status are both enabled, the imager will decode POSTNET symbols.

PLANET Status

PLANET (Postal Alphanumeric Encoding Technique) is a symbology used by the

United States Postal Service to track and identify items during delivery. Each PLANET symbol is either 12 or 14 digits long, and encodes data in half-height and full-height bars, making PLANET a “2-state” symbology. The symbol always starts and ends with a full-height bar, or “guard rail”, and each individual digit is represented by a set of five bars in which two of the bars are always short.

If U.S. Postal and PLANET Status are both enabled, the imager will decode PLANET symbols.

USPS4CB Status

USPS4CB, also called Intelligent Mail, is used by the United States Postal Service to sort and track individual items as well as flats of mail. USPS4CB combines the capabilities of

POSTNET and PLANET, and can encode 31 digits (65 bars). USPS4CB symbols are slightly longer than POSTNET symbols, and offer additional flexibility in choosing symbol height and width.

Data is encoded in four types of bars (“states”), each of which is identified by a name and a value. This type of postal symbol is known as “4-state”. Each bar has a “tracker”, or middle section, to which an “ascender” (top section) or “descender” (bottom section) may be added. The 4-state format allows the symbol to contain more information, and makes it easier to decode. 4-state symbols can also be printed easily in a variety of media, including dot matrix, inkjet, and laser.

If U.S. Postal and USPS4CB Status are both enabled, the imager will decode USPS4CB symbols.


5-85

Symbologies

POSTNET Allow B and B’ Fields

If U.S. Postal and POSTNET are enabled, and POSTNET Allow B and B’ Fields is enabled, the imager will allow B and B’ fields in POSTNET symbols.

Australia Post Allow 0 FCC

If Australia Post is enabled, and Australia Post Allow 0 FCC is enabled, the imager will allow 0 FCC in Australia Post symbols.

5-86


Parameters

GS1 DataBar

Note: GS1 DataBar symbologies were previously known as “Reduced Space Symbology” or “RSS”.

DataBar Expanded

Note: DataBar Expanded was previously known as “RSS Expanded”.

Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point-of-sale and other applications.

DataBar Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14-digit EAN item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters.

Where appropriate, use 1 (non-stacked) for better performance over 2 (stacked and non-stacked).

Fixed Symbol Length Status

When enabled, the imager will check the symbol length against the symbol length field, minus the embedded check character. If disabled, any length would be considered valid.

Fixed Symbol Length

Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Specifies the exact number of characters that the imager will recognize (this does not include start, stop, and check character characters). The imager ignores any symbol not having the specified length.


5-87

Symbologies

DataBar Limited

Note: DataBar Limited was previously known as “RSS Limited”.

DataBar Limited is designed to be read by laser scanners and CCD imagers. It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot imagers.

Encodes a smaller 14-digit symbol (74 modules wide) that is not omnidirectional.

DataBar Omnidirectional

Note: DataBar Omnidirectional was previously known as “RSS-14”.

Used in the grocery, retail, and prescription drug industries where 14-digit EAN item identification may be needed.

DataBar-14 is a fixed symbol length symbology that encodes 14 digits, including a 1-digit indicator. DataBar-14 is 96 modules wide. It can be stacked in two rows, it can read omnidirectionally if printed in full height, or horizontally if height-truncated for small marking.

Note: Where appropriate, use 1 (non-stacked) for better performance instead of 2

(stacked; decode both stacked and non-stacked).

5-88


Parameters

PDF417

Used in applications where a large amount of information (over 32 characters) needs to be encoded within a symbol, typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another.

For example, an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way, without reference to a database.

A two-dimensional, multi-row (3 to 90), continuous, variable-length symbology that has high data capacity (up to 2,700 numeric characters, 1,800 printable ASCII characters, or 1,100 binary characters per symbol). Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a

17-module structure.

Note: Sending

<a1>

from di-soric ID’s Terminal will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level (ECC Level n), number of rows (n

Rows), number of columns (n Columns), number of informative code words (n Info Code

Words) and the number of data characters (n Data Characters). This feature can be disabled by re-sending

<a1>

.


When Enabled, the imager will reject any PDF417 symbol that does not match the Fixed

Symbol Length.


Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read. The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length.

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect.


5-89

Symbologies

Codeword Collection

Single Image

The imager will attempt to decode the PDF417 symbol only from the information provided in a single image.

Multiple Image

The imager will process codewords from multiple images within the same read cycle and combine them to decode a single PDF417 symbol.

5-90


Parameters

MicroPDF417

Used for labelling small items that need large data capacity.

A variant of PDF417, a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol.


When Enabled, the imager will reject any MicroPDF417 symbol that does not match the

Fixed Symbol Length.


Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

When enabled, the MicroPDF417 symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read. The imager will ignore any symbol not having the specified length.

Note: Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect.


5-91

Symbologies

Aztec Code

Used in document imaging, railway ticket validation, and some postal applications.

A 2D matrix symbology built on a square grid with a square “bull’s-eye” pattern at the center. Aztec Code can encode up to 3,832 numeric or 3,067 alphabetical characters, or

1,914 bytes of data.

The level of Reed-Solomon error correction used with Aztec Code is configurable, from 5% to 95% of the total data region. The recommended error correction level is 23% of symbol capacity plus codewords.

Disabled

The imager will not attempt to decode Aztec symbols.

Enabled

The imager will attempt to decode Aztec symbols.

5-92


Parameters

Composite

When set to Enabled or Required, will decode the 2D composite component of a linear symbol. The linear symbol can be DataBar-14, DataBar Expanded, DataBar Limited,

EAN-128, UPC-A, EAN-13, EAN-8, and UPC-E.

Enabled

If Composite is set to Enabled, the imager will decode both the 2D composite and linear components. However, if the 2D composite component is not decoded, the linear data will be sent by itself at the end of the read cycle.

Required

If set to Required, the imager must decode both components, or a No Read will occur.

Separator Status

Allows the user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols.

Separates the linear and the composite component.

Separator

The Separator Character will be the same as the character defined in the

Multisymbol

Separator

field.

As required by the application.

Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character.


5-93

Symbologies

Symbology Identifier

Symbology Identifier is a standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type.

When enabled, the imager analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three-character identifying prefix to the data:

• ] (closed bracket character) indicating the presence of a symbology identifier.

• A, C, E, F, G, I, L, e, or Q

• (A = Code 39; C = Code 128; E = UPC/EAN; F = Codabar; G = Code 93; I = Interleaved

2 of 5; L = PDF417 and MicroPDF417; e = GS1 DataBar (RSS); Q = Pharmacode)

• Modifier

Example: ]C indicates a Code 128 symbol.

Disabled

When set to Disabled, symbol data output does not contain Symbology Identifier information.

Enabled

When set to Enabled, symbol data output contains a Symbology Identifier sequence.

Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39, Codabar, and Interleaved 2 of 5

• For Code 39, Codabar, and Interleaved 2 of 5, the modifier indicates Check Character and Check Character Output status.

• For Code 39 only, Full ASCII must be enabled to see modifiers 4, 5, and 7.

Modifier

4

5

7

0

1

3

Check

Character

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Check

Character

Output

N/A

Enabled

Disabled

N/A

Enabled

Disabled

Full ASCII Conversion

(Code 39 Only)

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Example: ]A5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Character and Check Character

Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed.

Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies

• For Code 128, a 1 indicates EAN 128; otherwise the modifier is 0.

• For all other symbologies, the modifier is 0.

5-94


Parameters

I/O Parameters


Then click the I/O tab to display the I/O Parameters tree control.

The

*





Note: I/O Parameters settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

I/O Parameters

section of

Appendix E

.


5-95

I/O Parameters


Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not be confused with Outputs 1, 2, and 3 listed in the Output Parameters which describe output states and functions.

Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions.

Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host.

Note: Symbol Data Output Status, if set to Match or Mismatch, will not take effect

unless

Matchcode Type

is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.

Symbol Data Output Status

Disabled

It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the imager to do the decision-making. When Disabled, the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks.

When set to Disabled, the imager will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle (symbols, No Reads, etc.)

Match

Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort, route, or verify based on matching the specific symbol data.

When set to Match, the imager transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol. However, if

Matchcode Type

is Disabled, it transmits on any good read.

Note: A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled.

Mismatch

Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container.

With Mismatch enabled, the imager transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol.


Good Read

Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted. It’s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified.

With Good Read enabled, the imager transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of

Matchcode Type

setting.


5-96


Parameters


This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host.

As Soon As Possible

As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host, typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data.

Note: More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read, depending on how

Decodes Before Output

is set.

Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded.


End of Read Cycle is useful in timing-based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time that it is decoded.

Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger.

Start of read cycle

End of read cycle

Read cycle duration

Host activates trigger

This is when host expects output


5-97

I/O Parameters

No Read Message

Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification.

When enabled, and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle, the No Read message will be transmitted to the host.

No Read Message Status

Disabled

Only symbol data is output after a read cycle.

Enabled

When the imager is in a triggered mode, a No Read message will be appended for each failed read attempt.

Message

Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message.

Note: No Read Message will only be transmitted if


is set to Match,

Mismatch, or Good Read. No Read Message can be set to any ASCII character.

5-98


Parameters

Read Duration Output

Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results, especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed (obtainable based on spacing between symbols.)

When enabled the duration of the read cycle (in milliseconds) is appended to the symbol data.

The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output.

Important: To measure the entire read cycle when in

External Level

trigger mode, set


to

End of Read Cycle

.

This output can measure over 49 days’ worth of duration; if exceeded, the “OVERFLOW” message will be output in place of the duration.

Separator

User-defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration

Output.


5-99

I/O Parameters

Output Indicators

The ID-06 has a beeper and two LED arrays, as follows:

1. An array of green LEDs projected from the front of the imager that can be programmed to flash in response to user-defined conditions.

2. An array of status LEDs on the side of the imager.

Green Flash Mode

Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred.

An array of green LEDs in the front of the imager can be programmed to flash in response to user-defined conditions.

Disabled

Green flash LEDs are disabled.

Good Read

Green flash LEDs will flash when a good read condition is met or when

Matchcode

is

enabled and a match occurs.

5-100


Parameters

Static Presentation

Static Presentation Mode is used in conjunction with

Continuous Read

mode.

When operating in Static Presentation Mode, the red LEDs will illuminate while the imager is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode. When a symbol is placed in the field of view and a good read occurs, the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in

Green Flash Duration

. Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in


.

Note: If Static Presentation Mode is selected but the imager is not in Continuous Read, the Green Flash will not occur.

To use Static Presentation:

1. Enable Continuous Read.

2. Select the number of symbols.

3. Enable Static Presentation in


.

4. Select the read time in Green Flash Duration.

Match

The green LEDs will flash when a match condition is met. If multisymbol is enabled, then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match. If matchcode is disabled, then this mode will activate the LEDs on a good read.

Mismatch

Same as Match, except that LEDs will illuminate on a mismatch.

Strobe

The green flash will be used as an illumination strobe for image capture. If it is required that the green flood is the only illumination for image capture then the internal illumination

LED’s can be disabled.


5-101

I/O Parameters

Targeting

Always Off

The targeting LEDs remain off.

On Only When Not In Read Cycle

The targeting LEDs illuminate while the imager is not in a read cycle. When a read cycle is entered the targeting LEDs will turn off, they will come back on upon exiting.

On Only When In Read Cycle

The targeting LEDs illuminate upon entering a read cycle, and will turn off upon exiting the read cycle.

Always On

The targeting LEDs are always illuminated.


Provides visual verification that a good read has occurred.

When a good read occurs, the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the time set in the Green Flash Duration value.

5-102


Parameters

Beeper

An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred.

A beep is emitted after each good read or No Read.

Note: The beeper will also sound at any of the following times:

• When the imager is defaulted.

• When a Send and Save command is sent from di-soric ID.

• At the conclusion of an Auto Calibration procedure.

• When a

<Z>

,

<Zp>

,

<Zrd>

, or

<K701,,1>

command is sent from di-soric ID’s Terminal.


5-103

I/O Parameters

LED Configuration

When the Symbol Grade Standard is set to ISO/IEC 16022 grade and the Bar Graph is configured for Grading, this parameter determines which ISO/IEC 16022 grade to display on the LED bar graph. Using the read rate scale as reference if the ISO/IEC 16022 grade result was a grade A, all the LEDs from 20% to 100% would be illuminated. If the result was a grade F, only the 20% LED would illuminate.

ISO/IEC 16022 Grade

Final Grade

LEDs represent ISO/IEC 16022 final grade.

Symbol Contrast

LEDs represent ISO/IEC 16022 Symbol Contrast grade.

Print Growth

LEDs represent ISO/IEC 16022 Print Growth grade.

Axial Non-Uniformity

LEDs represent ISO/IEC 16022 Axial Non-Uniformity grade.

Unused ECC

LEDs represent ISO/IEC 16022 Unused ECC grade.

5-104


Parameters

Serial Verification

Allows the user to verify configuration command status.

Serial Command Echo Status

This command is useful in removing any doubt about the imager’s interpretation of any configuration command.

For example, if the current preamble is “SOM” and

<K141,1,START>

is entered, the imager will echo back

<K141,SOM>

since the attempted entry “START” exceeds the four character limit for that command. Therefore, it is rejected and the existing “SOM” message is echoed back and remains the preamble message.

When enabled, a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to the host with the resultant settings.

Host

Imager

If a command with multiple fields is processed, some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not. The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change.

Serial Command Beep Status

Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command.

Causes the imager to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed.

If an invalid command is entered, the imager beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry.

However, this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly.

Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response.


5-105

I/O Parameters

Control / Hex Output

Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial commands on a terminal.

Determines the response to a

Serial Command Echo

or status request command.

When set to Control, two characters are transmitted to represent a non-displayable character. For example, a carriage return will be shown as: ^M.

5-106


Parameters

EZ Trax Output

EZ Trax Output Status

When EZ Trax output is enabled, the imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options. EZ Trax will not function unless enabled.

Comm Port

Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files.

Image Mode

Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output.


5-107

I/O Parameters

Image Format

Selects the format of the image output file.

JPEG Quality

Sets the amount of JPEG image compression. A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality, and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality.

Object Info Output

If a symbol is decoded during an image capture, the symbol type and other supplementary symbol information is also included.

5-108


Parameters

Grade Output

Symbol quality information will be output in the form of an abbreviated identifier for each read cycle.


5-109

I/O Parameters

EZ Button

EZ Button

Serves as a master switch to enable/disable the EZ Button status.

The EZ Button has four positions:

Single Beep

,

Two Beeps

,

Three Beeps

, and

Four

Beeps

, selectable by the length of time the button is held down, and indicated by one,

two, three, and four beeps in succession. Each position can be programmed for any of eight

EZ Button Modes

.

5-110


Parameters

EZ Button Status

Disabled

When set to Disabled, the EZ Button does not function.

Enabled

When selected, the EZ Button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the

EZ Button Modes

command.

Trigger

When selected, the EZ Button acts as a trigger for the imager to start and end read cycles.

All other button operations are inactive.

In External

Level:

In External

Edge:

The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ Button is pressed, unless a timeout occurs and


is set to

Timeout

.

As with

External Level

,

External Edge

allows a read cycle to be initiated

by pressing the EZ Button, but unlike

External Level

, the read cycle ends with a good read output, a timeout, or a new trigger.

Unlatch Outputs

In this configuration, the EZ Button will unlatch any logic outputs that have been latched.

Parameter Switch

The parameter switch toggles between custom defaults and power-on settings. The condition is the same as that achieved by sending the

<Arc>

and

<Arp>

commands consecutively.


5-111

I/O Parameters

Default on Power-On

When enabled, if the EZ Button is held down on power-on, the imager will default to customer defaults and save for power-on. This is the same as sending a

<Zrc>

command from disoric ID’s Terminal.

Load Configuration Database

Loads Configuration Database settings to the imager.

Save for Power-On

Saves imager settings for Power-On.

5-112


Parameters

EZ Button Modes

Useful for performing multiple, repetitive tasks at the work site.

Allows the user to program each of the EZ Button’s 4 positions from a selection of 7 modes.

Single Beep

Hold down button until a single beep is heard.

Disabled

When set to Disabled, the associated button position will have no function associated with it, and the position will be skipped over.

Read Rate

Read Rate is initiated when the associated button position is selected. Read Rate will perform decodes/second and is the same as sending a

<C>

from di-soric ID’s Terminal. To exit Read Rate, quickly press and release the EZ Button.

Calibrate

Calibrate is initiated when the associated button position is selected. To cancel Calibration, quickly press and release the EZ Button.


All imager settings will be saved to non-volatile memory to be recalled on power-on whenever the associated button position is selected. This is the same as sending a

<Z>

from di-soric ID’s Terminal.

Load New Master

Functions in the same way as

New Master Pin

input whenever the associated button position is selected.

Target System (Default)

When the imager reaches this position, the targeting pattern appears. The targeting pattern remains illuminated even if a different position is subsequently selected until this position selection is disabled. To turn the targeting pattern off, quickly press and release the EZ

Button.

Bar Code Configuration

Enables Bar Code Configuration Mode whenever the associated button position is selected. When enabled, the imager can accept configuration commands from symbols.

To disable, quickly press and release the EZ Button.


5-113

I/O Parameters

Two Beeps

Hold down button until two beeps are heard.

Disabled


Read Rate


<C>


Calibrate (Default)




<Z>


Load New Master


New Master Pin


Target System


Button.




5-114


Parameters

Three Beeps

Hold down button until three beeps are heard.

Disabled


Read Rate (Default)


<C>


Calibrate




<Z>


Load New Master


New Master Pin


Target System


Button.





5-115

I/O Parameters

Four Beeps

Hold down button until four beeps are heard.

Disabled


Read Rate


<C>


Calibrate


Save for Power-On (Default)


<Z>


Load New Master


New Master Pin


Target System


Button.




5-116


Parameters

Status Indicators

The ID-06 features an array of LEDs that indicate various aspects of imager activity.

Controls the operation of the MOD/ACT and NET/LNK LEDs.

Disabled

When set to Disabled, the MOD/ACT and NET/LNK LEDs are always off.

Note: All green and red LEDs will turn on briefly during power-on or reset to confirm that they are functioning.

PHY Activity

If Ethernet is available:

LNK = Solid green when transceiver is linked.

ACT = Blinking green when transceiver detects Tx or Rx activity.

Otherwise, for all RS232 and RS422/485 activity:

LNK = Blinking green with Tx data activity.

ACT = Blinking green with Rx data activity.

Note: Red is never turned on.

Protocol Activity

If EtherNet/IP is enabled:

MOD = Module status, per EtherNet/IP specification

NET = Network status, per EtherNet/IP specification

Otherwise, the MOD and NET LEDs are always off.


5-117

I/O Parameters

Bar Graph

Read Rate, Auto Calibration, Bar Code Configuration, and Read Cycle Result all share the

Bar Graph (20% – 100%) LEDs.

I/O 1

I/O 1 always shows the combined state of the discrete outputs. If any output is active, the I/O 1 LED will be on.

I/O 2

I/O 2 always shows the state of the hardware input trigger. If the trigger is active, I/O 2 will be on.

5-118


Parameters

Calibration Options

This command specifies the operation of the calibration feature. The default configuration is setup to perform calibration on gain, focus and symbol type. Shutter speed is disabled as the default setting, since shutter speed is more of an application specific parameter and normally should be configured by the user to meet the requirements of the application.

The calibration process will optimize the gain setting for the configured shutter speed

(Camera).

Note: Background color (Reverse Video) is part of the calibration process, regardless of the calibration setup. After successful completion of calibration, the background color will be set to the appropriate value depending on the calibrated symbol. The mirrored image parameter is not part of the calibration process, and must be configured appropriately by the user prior to calibration (Mirrored Image).

Gain

Disabled

The gain is fixed and is not part of the calibration process.

Enabled

The gain will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance.


5-119

I/O Parameters

Shutter Speed

Unless an application is a static setup, the shutter speed setting should be configured by the user based on their application. For dynamic applications the user should configure the shutter speed setting, so the calibration process can optimize the gain for that setting.

The following table illustrates a general guide-line for shutter speed configurations for various line speeds.

Note:

This is a general guide line, and depends on the scanners optical configuration and symbol element size.

Don’t Calibrate

The shutter speed is fixed and is not part of the calibration process.

Calibrate

The shutter speed will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance.

Calibrate Fast Shutter

The calibration process will concentrate on achieving the fastest possible shutter setting that still will still have good performance. The image quality or contrast may not be as good as what would be achieved with the “Enabled” setting. The calibration process is not designed to choose the fastest shutter speed that can decode a symbol, but rather to optimize for the fastest shutter speed that still provides good image quality.

5-120


Parameters

Focus Position (Standard ID-06 Only)

Since the focus can be configured by simply entering the target distance value from the imager, normally the user will configure the focus without requiring calibration. However, if it is necessary to calibrate the focus distance there are two methods to accommodate this task.


The focus position is fixed and is not part of the calibration process.

Calibrate

The focus position will be calibrated to provide the best image quality and performance.

This method is a simply “Search” method that tries to identify the desired focus through a search algorithm that cycles through focus settings, with a configuration of camera settings to try and locate as quickly as possible the desired focus. This is accomplished when a symbol is decoded. Once a focus distance has been located that will successfully decode a symbol, the algorithm will fine tune the search to locate the inside and outside focal distances.

The final focus distance is selected as the focus distance that is in the center of these two values. This method can be time consuming if the focus is not found on the 1st pass.


5-121

I/O Parameters

Symbol Type


Only the current symbologies enabled will be considered during the calibration process.

Calibrate

Autodiscrimination is in effect during the calibration process. All symbologies readable by the product, except PDF417 and Pharmacode will be attempted during calibration. Any new symbologies successfully decode during calibration will remain enabled at the end of the process. All enabled symbologies will remain enabled. For example, assume that only Code 39 is enabled at the beginning of calibration. If a Code 128 symbol is read during calibration, then Code 128 as well as Code 39 will thereafter be enabled.

Window of Interest Framing

If a WOI framing mode is enabled, when calibration begins it will set the camera WOI to a full size image. Once a symbol is decoded, the camera WOI will be zoomed in both vertically and horizontally (regardless which WOI mode is enabled) to include the symbol plus an additional margin. This is done to speed up the calibration process. When calibration completes, and is successful, then the camera WOI will be adjusted according to the mode enabled. Otherwise, the original WOI configuration will be retained.


The Window of Interest is not modified after the completion of Calibration.

5-122


Parameters

Row and Column

If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest will be modified to frame the symbol plus an addition margin area around the symbol, determined by the “WOI margin” parameter.

Row

If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest rows will be modified to horizontally frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the “WOI margin” parameter.

Column

If the calibration process is successful the Window of Interest columns will be modified to vertically frame the symbol plus an addition margin determined by the “WOI margin” parameter.

Window of Interest Margin

Sets the margin size that is applied to the calibrated label, and is specified in number of pixels. If margin causes image to exceed maximum image size, it will be reduced accordingly.


5-123

I/O Parameters

Database Identifier Output

Useful in tracking which database entries read which symbols.

Database Identifier Output Status

Disabled

When this command is disabled, no database identifier information will be output.

Enabled

When this command is enabled, the imager will append a two-digit number and the characters

“DB” to the data output following the separator for each symbol decoded using Configuration

Database. For example, if the separator is an underscore character and the second database entry reads a symbol encoded with “data capture” during the read cycle, the symbol data output will be “data capture_DB02”. If the database is not active, no identifiers will be attached to output.

Separator Character

The separator character separates the symbol data from the database identifier.

5-124


Parameters

Input 1

Input Mode

Determines the function of the Input pin.

Disabled

When set to Disabled, the Input pin has no impact on operation.

Reset Counts

When set to Reset Counts, a transition to the active state of the Input will cause the imager to reset the internal counters.

Unlatch Output

This setting is used in combination with any of the three outputs in

Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch

Input # 1 Pin)

. A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were

previously latched.

Active State

Active Open

Input function is activated when input state is de-energized.

Active Closed

Input function is activated when input state is energized.


5-125

I/O Parameters

Output 1 Parameters

Output On

Output On provides discrete signalling to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays. It is useful for routing, sorting, and to prevent mis-packaging and mis-routing.

Sets the discrete output functions for specific user-selected conditions. Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output (or outputs) will be activated.

Note: If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch, a transition (switching) will not occur

unless

Matchcode Type

is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.

Mismatch or No Read

Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle.

Good Read / Match

Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol.

Note: To output on Good Read when

Matchcode

is not enabled, enable any output for

Match.

Mismatch

Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol.

No Read

Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle.

Trend Analysis

Typically used when successful decodes are occurring but a discrete output is needed to flag a trend in quality issues.

Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met, depending on the trend analysis option enabled.

5-126


Parameters

Diagnostic Warning

Typically used when a discrete indication of a diagnostic condition is needed.

Activates discrete output when a diagnostic warning condition is met, depending on the diagnostic option enabled.

In Read Cycle

Activates a discrete output when the imager is in a read cycle.


5-127

I/O Parameters

Output State

Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output.

Pulse Width

Sets the time that the discrete output remains active.

Output Mode

Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de-activated.

Pulse

This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width.

Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch Input # 1 Pin)

The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input # 1 Pin transitions.

Note:

Input 1

must be set to

Unlatch Output

for Latch Mode 1 to function.

If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid, then the read cycle will wait for

Input 1 to unlatch the output before continuing on. This is to provide system handshake ability despite communication channel. The read cycle data must leave all channels before

Read Cycle Data Valid will output.

5-128


Parameters

Latch Mode 2 (Unlatch Opposite Condition)

The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met.

For example, if No Read is enabled under Output On, the programmable output will go active on a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition, a good read, occurs.

If the Output Condition is set to Read Cycle Data Valid, then the read cycle will continue but every new Read Cycle Data Valid event causes the output to change state to the opposite condition. This provides a toggle event per every read cycle output. The only known outout state will be the on a power-on or reset. After reading begins, the state becomes undetermined. Only the state change itself has meaning—not the absolute value.

Latch Mode 3 (Unlatch Re-enter Read Cycle)

The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until a new read cycle begins.

Note: All of the Output On modes are inhibited when any Diagnostic Warning is active for Output 1.


5-129

I/O Parameters

Trend Analysis

Note: Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function.

Under Output 1 Parameters, expand the Trend Analysis tree.

Useful in cases where the user doesn’t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions.

Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1.

With Trend Analysis, the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches,

No Reads, and the number of reads per trigger, and output the results to any of three outputs.

Trend Analysis Mode = No Read

Trigger Evaluation Period = 25 triggers (read cycles)

Number to Output On = 4

In this example, the imager will activate an output when 4 No Reads occur within a period of 25 triggers (read cycles).

Trend Analysis Mode

Sets the trend condition (Mismatch, No Read, Decodes per Trigger, Bad Symbol, or No

Symbol) that will activate the output.

Mismatch

Output will be activated when the number of mismatches equals the value entered for

Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers.

No Read

Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for


Decodes per Trigger

Output will be activated when the number of decodes equals the value entered for Number

to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers.

5-130


Number of Triggers

The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition.

Parameters

Number to Output On

Example: If Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No

Read, then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred.

Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events (mismatches, No Reads, or reads/trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode) to occur within the trigger evaluation period before activating the associated output.


5-131

I/O Parameters

Decodes per Trigger

When set to this mode, and when the appropriate output is set to output on trend analysis, the imager will function in a Decodes per Trigger mode during the read cycle and the trend analysis operation. Output will be activated based on whether or not the symbol decode count at the end of the read cycle is less than the decodes per trigger threshold.

Note: Although this setup causes the imager to function in a Decodes per Trigger mode, the decode count will only be appended to the symbol data if the status of the Decodes

per Trigger command is enabled.

Example:

Decodes per Trigger threshold: 100

100 or more decodes = No output

Fewer than 100 decodes = Output fires

5-132


Parameters

Symbol Quality (ISO/IEC 16022)

Output on Symbol Contrast

The symbol contrast is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value.

Output on Print Growth

The print growth is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value.

Output on Axial Non-Uniformity

The axial non-uniformity is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value.

Output On Unused ECC

The unused ECC is formatted and attached to the Data Matrix symbol data as either a grade or value.


5-133

I/O Parameters

Symbol Contrast Threshold

This is the grade to use as a threshold for driving the output. Output will be driven if the

Symbol Contrast grade is under the threshold.

Print Growth Threshold


Print Growth grade is under the threshold.

Axial Non-Uniformity Threshold


Axial Non-Uniformity grade is under the threshold.

Unused ECC Threshold


Unused ECC grade is under the threshold.

5-134


Parameters

Diagnostics

Note: Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function.

Under Output 1 Parameters, expand the Diagnostics tree.

When Diagnostic Warning is enabled, the Output On configuration has no effect. The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic warning conditions is met. The output will become inactive once it detects that there are no diagnostic warning conditions.

Service Unit

Allows the user to set up the output to toggle to active when the service timer has expired.

This condition will only be held for one service timer click.

Note: This feature cannot be used if the imager is in

Continuous Read

.

When Service Unit is enabled, a message of up to 10 ASCII characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service timer’s limit has been reached. The service timer is reset at power-on, meaning that the service timer’s limit is the amount of time since last reset. Service timer increments can be set in seconds or minutes.


5-135

I/O Parameters


Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1.

Output On



Note: If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch, a transition (switching) will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.





Note: To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled, enable any output for

Match.

Mismatch


No Read





5-136


Parameters




In Read Cycle



5-137

I/O Parameters

Output State


Pulse Width

Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active.

Output Mode


Pulse



The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input # 1 Pin.

Note: Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function.




5-138


Parameters









5-139

I/O Parameters

Trend Analysis














Mismatch



No Read






5-140




Parameters






5-141

I/O Parameters





Example:




5-142


Parameters











5-143

I/O Parameters













5-144


Parameters

Diagnostics




Service Unit




Continuous Read

.



5-145

I/O Parameters


Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2.

Note: If you are using a ID-06 C-Mount and External Illumination Mode is enabled, the parameters for Output On, Pulse Width, and Output Mode are ignored.

Output On



Note: If Output On is set to Match or Mismatch, a transition (switching) will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory.





Note: To output on Good Read when Matchcode is not enabled, enable any output for

Match.

Mismatch


No Read





5-146


Parameters


5-147

I/O Parameters




In Read Cycle


5-148


Output State


Note: Normally Closed is the default for the ID-06 C-Mount.

Pulse Width

Sets the time in 1 ms increments that the discrete output remains active.

Output Mode


Parameters

Pulse



The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the Input # 1 Pin.

Note: Input 1 must be set to Unlatch Output for Latch Mode 1 to function.





5-149

I/O Parameters








5-150


Parameters

Trend Analysis














Mismatch



No Read







5-151

I/O Parameters







5-152


Parameters





Example:





5-153

I/O Parameters










5-154


Parameters














5-155

I/O Parameters

Diagnostics




Service Unit




Continuous Read

.


5-156


Quality Output

Quality Output Separator

The separator character separates quality output data from symbol data.

Parameters

Decodes per Trigger Status

When Enabled, the imager enters a state where it processes frames as configured until the end of a read cycle, with or without a successful symbol decode. When the read cycle ends, the imager outputs any decoded symbol data along with the decodes per trigger count.


5-157

Symbol Quality

Symbol Quality


Then click the Symbol Quality tab to display the Symbol Quality tree control.

The

*


To open nested options, single-click the +.


Note: Symbol Quality settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format.

5-158


Parameters

Global

Total Read Time

When enabled, outputs the amount of time that was required by the imager to decode the symbol.

Symbol Quality Separator

This field specifies the separator used to separate the quality output data.

Output Mode

Determines how symbol quality evaluations will be output.


5-159

Symbol Quality

Data Matrix

ISO/IEC 16022 Parameters

Symbol Contrast

Outputs the candidate symbol’s Symbol Contrast value.

Print Growth

Outputs the candidate symbol’s Print Growth value.

Axial Non-Uniformity

Outputs the candidate symbol’s Axial Non-Uniformity value.

Unused ECC

Outputs the candidate symbol’s Unused ECC value.

5-160


Parameters

Grading

Percent Cell Damage

The percent of symbol cells that are damaged.

Capture Time

The amount of time the imager required to capture the area in which the symbol was located.

Locate Time

The amount of time the imager required to locate the symbol.

Decode Time

The amount of time the imager required to decode the symbol.

Pixels Per Element

The average number of pixels in a symbol element.

ECC Level

The level of error correction used when decoding the symbol.

Matrix Size

The size of the symbol’s matrix area (the area composed of the symbol’s elements).

Quiet Zone

The size of the quiet zone around the symbol.

Symbol Angle

The angle at which the symbol is printed or marked.


5-161

Symbol Quality

Report Tab

The Report tab allows the user to initiate Data Matrix Grading and to generate and save grading reports.

To save the report as a PDF file, an HTML file, a CSV file, or an RTF file, click the Save

Report button.

Reports appear in the viewing area underneath the Data Matrix Grading and Save

Report buttons.

The Symbol Quality interface is divided into three sections:

Report, Locate, and

Preferences.

The imager’s field of view is shown here.

When grading is completed, the initial report is also shown in this viewing area.

5-162


Parameters

Locate Tab

The Locate tab allows the user to determine the position of the symbol within the imager’s field of view, and to optimize the imager’s camera settings for symbol quality evaluation.

Click the Locate button to display the symbol in the imager’s field of view.

Click the Calibrate button to optimize camera settings.


5-163

Symbol Quality

Preferences Tab

The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when grading is completed. For this reason, the user is advised to set preferences before performing

5-164


Parameters

grading.

This information is appended at the bottom of the report.

Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab.

Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page.

Enables di-soric ID to parse

UII symbol data into the correct fields and output order defined by the U.S. Department of Defense IUID initia-

Typically you will be asked where you wish to store your report.

If you do not want to be prompted to choose a file path, click Store Report

without file path prompt.

Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image with your saved report as a

Bitmap or JPEG image file.

Returns all settings to default.

Returns all settings to most recent.


5-165

Matchcode

Matchcode


Then click the Matchcode tab to display the Matchcode tree control.

The

*





Note: Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

Matchcode

section of

Appendix E

.

5-166


Parameters

Overview of Matchcode

Matchcode allows the user to store master symbol data in the imager’s memory, compare that data against other symbol data, and define how symbol data and/or discrete signal output will be directed.

A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols.

Note: Matchcode will function with multiple symbols; however, if

Matchcode Type

is set

to

Sequential

or if

Trigger Mode

is set to


, the imager will

behave as if



Matchcode is used in applications to sort, route, or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section. For example, a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol.

Steps for Entering and Using Master Symbols

1. Set

Trigger Mode

to

External Level

,

External Edge

, or

Serial Data

.

2. Choose the method of symbol comparison that fits the application.

3. Define the type of output required with Matchcode setup: a. Symbol data output b. Discrete output

4. Select the number of master symbols required.

5. Decide how the master symbol(s) will be entered: a. Use di-soric ID to type master symbol data directly.

b. Send a serial command with symbol data in the form of

<K231,master symbol#, data>

.

c. Send a

<G>

(Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol) command.

d. Enable the

New Master Pin

command and activate the discrete input to store the next symbol read as the master symbol.


5-167

Matchcode

Matchcode Type

Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols.

Note: First set

Trigger Mode

to

External Level

,

External Edge

, or

Serial Data

.

Wild Card

Allows the user to enter user-defined wild card characters in the master symbol.

Note: If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential, the imager will behave as if

Number of

Symbols


Sequential

Instructs the imager to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol.

Instructs the imager to sequence after each match (numeric only) and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers.

Sequential Matching

Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially.

With Sequential enabled, Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending

(incremental) or descending (decremental) order.

5-168


Parameters

Match Start Position

Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparison. For example, if a symbol contains a part number, manufacturing date, and lot code info, but only the part number information is needed, set the imager to sort only the part number and to ignore the other characters.

Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol (from left to right) that will be compared with those of the master symbol, when

Matchcode Type

is set to Enabled or Sequential.

For example, if Match Start Position is set to 3, the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared, up to the number of characters specified by Match Length.

Note: Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature. A 0 setting will disable this feature.

Match Length

Example: If Match Length is set to 6 in a 10-character symbol, and Match Start Position is set to 2, only the 2nd through 7th characters (from left to right) will be compared.

Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater. When Match Start Position is set to 0, no comparison will occur.


5-169

Matchcode

Wild Card

Example: With Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk, defining CR*34 as the master symbol will result in matches for CR134 and CR234, but not CR2345. Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol, as in CR*, will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1, CR23, CR358, etc.

Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol.

5-170


Parameters

Sequence on No Read

Sequence on No Read is useful when the imager needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs.

When Sequence on No Read is Enabled and

Matchcode Type

is set to Sequential, the imager sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read. When disabled, it does not sequence on a No Read.

Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Enabled:

Master Symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

Decoded Symbol

001

002

No Read

004

No Read

No Read

007

Master Symbol after Decode

002

003

004 (sequence on No Read)

005



008

Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on No Read Disabled:

Master Symbol

001

002

003

003

004

004

004


001

002

No Read

003

No Read

No Read

004


002

003

003 (not sequenced)

004

004 (not sequenced)

004 (not sequenced)

005


5-171

Matchcode

Sequence on Mismatch

Note:

Matchcode Type

must be set to Sequential for this command to function.

Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur. When set to Enabled, the master symbol sequences on every decode, match, or mismatch.

Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur. When set to Disabled, the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur.

The imager will sequence the master to one more or one less than the decoded symbol.

Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Enabled:

Master Symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

007


001

002 abc

004 def ghi

007


002

003

004 (sequence on mismatch)

005



008

Consider the following decodes as an example of Sequence on Mismatch Disabled:

Master Symbol

001

002

003

004

005

006

006


001

002 abc

004 def ghi

006


002

003

004 (sequenced because of previous match)

005

006 (sequenced because of previous match)

006 (not sequenced)

007

5-172


Parameters

Sequence Step

When the master symbol is sequenced (incremented/decremented), Sequence Step defines the magnitude of change.

New Master Pin

If Matchcode and New Master Pin are enabled and the new master pin is momentarily connected to ground (must be held low for a minimum of 10 ms), master symbol information will be loaded into the database based on the next read cycle that achieves a Good Read, starting with Index 1. The Master Database will be loaded with all symbols decoded in the read cycle as long as it does not exceed the Master Symbol Database Size parameter.

New Master Load Status

The new master status responds with the number of the next master position to be loaded, where 0 represents “idle” or “no master to be loaded.”

Example: If the user has the Master Symbol Database Size set to 1, and then either sends a

<G>

or toggles an active New Master Pin, the state will be 1, and prior to reading and effectively loading position 1, the response to

<NEWM>

would be <NEWM/1>. Once a symbol has been read and loaded, the status will be cleared: <NEWM/0>.


5-173

Matchcode

Match Replace

Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol.

Outputs a user-defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled.

Replacement String

User-defined data string that, when enabled, replaces symbol data whenever a match occurs.

Mismatch Replace

Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a predefined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol.

Outputs a user-defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled.


User-defined data string that, when enabled, replaces symbol data whenever a mismatch occurs.

5-174


Parameters

Diagnostics


Then click the Diagnostics tab to display the Diagnostics tree control.

The

*





Note: Matchcode settings can also be sent to the imager from di-soric ID’s Terminal using di-soric’s K command format. Refer to the

Diagnostics

section of

Appendix E

.


5-175

Diagnostics

Hours Since Reset (Read-only)

Used as a troubleshooting tool that can help pinpoint the cause of a reset.

Records the number of hours and minutes of operation since the last system reset.

Hours

16-bit counter that increments every 60 minutes.

Range: 0 to 23 hours.

Minutes

16-bit counter that increments every 60 seconds.

Range: 0 to 59 minutes.

5-176


Parameters

Service Message

Status

When Enabled, a Service Message of up to 128 characters is sent whenever the system detects that the service time has expired.

Service Message

Allows the user to define a service message of up to 128 characters.

Threshold

Allows the user to determine the length of time until the service message will be sent.

Resolution

The service timer has a resolution field for setting up the timer increment. Options are increments of seconds or minutes.


5-177

Diagnostics

User-Defined Name

User-Defined Name allows the user to enter any combination of ASCII characters to identify the imager.

5-178


ID-06

6 Terminal

Contents

Terminal Window.......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Find .............................................................................................................................................. 6-3

Send ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4

Macros.......................................................................................................................................... 6-5

Terminal Window Menus.............................................................................................................. 6-6

This section describes the multiple functions of di-soric ID’s Terminal interface.


6-1

Terminal Window

Terminal Window

Click this button to display the Terminal view.

Copy, paste, save Type text here to find matching text in the Terminal window.

Terminal screen

Clear screen

Type serial commands here.

Macros listed on this bar

Click on Macros arrow to Add Macro,

Remove Macro, or Edit Macro.

Click on desired

Macro to run.

The Terminal interface allows the user to send serial commands to the imager by using macros, by copying and pasting, or by typing commands in the Send text field.

The Terminal also displays symbol data or information from the imager.

Right-clicking on the Terminal screen displays a menu of additional options.

6-2


Terminal

Find

The Find function allows the user to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal.

For example:

1. Type “ABC” into the Find box.

2. Press Enter.

The first instance of “ABC” will be highlighted in the Terminal window.

3. Click the Find button to the left of the text field to locate additional instances of “ABC”.


6-3

Send

Send

The Send function allows the user to enter serial commands and then send them to the imager.

1. Type the command into the Send box.

2. Press Enter.

3. Click the Send button to the left of the text field to send the command additional times.

6-4


Terminal

Macros

Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar, edited in a separate window, and executed by clicking on the macro name.

Click on Next

Row to see the next row of macros

Click on the first arrow here to see Add

Macro or Default Macros.

When macros are defaulted, the entire macro set is restored to the original macro commands.

Click on subsequent arrows to edit macros.

Click a macro button to execute it in the Terminal.

If the macro is a command, it is sent to the imager at the same time that it is displayed.

Editing a Macro

Click the arrow next to any macro and select Edit to display the following dialog:

Edit the macro value or type a new Macro Name in the text field provided and define it in the Macro Value field. Click OK to save the entry.


6-5

Terminal Window Menus

Terminal Window Menus

Right-click on the Terminal window to display the following menu:

• Copy selected text to clipboard.

• Paste from Terminal or other text.

• Clear all text in Terminal window.

• Select All text in the Terminal window.

• Save... brings up a Save As dialog.

• Change Font... of text in Terminal; brings up a Font dialog.

• Change Echo Font... to change typed text; brings up a Font dialog.

• Enable Echo enables Echo text (typed by user).

• Change Background Color of Terminal window.

• Non-Printable Characters allows the user to hide non-printable characters, or to show them in Standard or Enhanced format.

• Default Settings returns all the above settings to default.

• Keyboard Macros allows the user to create new keyboard macro commands that can be sent from function keys (F2, F4, F5, etc.)

Terminal Dropdown Menu

The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text, Save Current Text, Send File, Find

Next, and Find Previous functions, as well as the same functions defined above.

• Capture Text... allows the user to append data in real time to a text file. While in operation, the text file cannot be opened. Pause interrupts the capture flow and Stop ends the flow and opens the file.

• Save Current Text... saves all text in the Terminal window to a text file.

• Find Next searches for a user-defined section of text in the Terminal.

• Find Previous operates in the same way as Find

Next, but searches backward through Terminal text.

6-6


7 Utilities

Contents

Serial Utility Commands ............................................................................................................... 7-2

Read Rate .................................................................................................................................... 7-4

Counters ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6

Device Control .............................................................................................................................. 7-9

Differences from Default............................................................................................................. 7-10

Master Database ........................................................................................................................ 7-11

Firmware..................................................................................................................................... 7-17

Bar Code Configuration Mode .................................................................................................... 7-21

Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 7-22

Default/Reset/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-23

Imager Status ............................................................................................................................. 7-25

Learn Operations........................................................................................................................ 7-27

Reboot System ........................................................................................................................... 7-28

Static Validation.......................................................................................................................... 7-29

Targeting .................................................................................................................................... 7-31

Y-Modem Transfer Options ........................................................................................................ 7-32

This section explains the function and purpose of serial utility commands, which are generally performed during imager operation.

7-1


Serial Utility Commands

Serial Utility Commands

Note: For a list of all K commands, see

Serial Commands

.

Type


Calibration

Counters

Default/Reset/Save

Device Control

Firmware/Checksum

<

Zrd

>

<

ZRDall

>

<

Zrc

>

<

#b

>

<

#d

>

<

#k

>

<

#s

>

<

#.

>

<

#a.

>

<

L1

>

<

L2

>

<

L3

>



<

H

>

<

#

>

<

#a

>

Command

<

BCCFG

>

<

@CAL

>

<

@OPTIC

>

<

N

>

<

O

>

<

T

>



<

V

>

<

W

>

<

X

>

<

Y

>

<

A

>

<

Ard

>

<

Arp

>

<

Arc

>

<

Z

>

<

Zc

>

Name

Enter Bar Code Configuration

Calibrate

Initiate Lens Calibration (Standard ID-06 only)

No Read Counter

No Read Counter Reset

Trigger Counter

Trigger Counter Reset

Good Read/Match Counter

Good Read/Match Counter Reset

Mismatch Counter

Mismatch Counter Reset

Software Reset – Retain Current Parameters

Software Reset – Recall Factory Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Power-On Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Customer Defaults

Software Reset – Save Current Settings for Power-On

Software Reset – Save Current Settings as Customer

Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Factory Defaults and Save for Power-On

Software Reset – Recall Factory Defaults, Default

“Sticky” Parameters, and Save for Power-On

Software Reset – Recall Customer Defaults and

Save for Power-On

Programmable Output 1



Disable Imager

Enable Imager

Display All Part Numbers

Display Application Code Part Number

Display Boot Code Part Number

Display DSP Code Part Number

Display Kernel Code Part Number

Display SafeMode Part Number

Display All Firmware Build Numbers

Display Application Code Build Number

7-2



Imager Status

Learn

Master Database

Read Rate

Reboot System

Static Validation

Targeting

Y-Modem Transfer

Options

Utilities

<

#b.

>

<

#d.

>

<

#k.

>

<

!

>

<

!a

>

<

!d

>

<

rb,

key>

<

?

>

<

K?

>

<

K??

>

<

K?#

>

<

Knnn?

>

<

Knnn??

>

<

Knnn?#

>

<

Knnnd

>

<

LEARN

>

<

UNLEARN

>

<

LEARN?

>

<

G

>

<

Gn

>

<

NEWM

>

<

C

>

<

Cp

>

<

J

>

<

reboot

>

<

VAL

>

<

l1

>

<

l0

>

<

uy,

path and image file name>

<

dy,

image file name>

<

dy,

key>

Display Boot Code Build Number

Display DSP Code Build Number

Display Kernel Code Build Number

Display All Available Firmware Checksums

Display Application Code Code Checksum

Display DSP Code Checksum

Roll Back Application Code

Imager Status Request

All Status Request

All Descriptor Request

All Range Request

Single Status Request

Single Descriptor Request

Single Range Request

Single Command Default

Initiate Learn Operation

Initiate Unlearn Operation

Display Learn Status

Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1

Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n

New Master Load Status

Enter Decodes/Second Test

Enter Decode Percent Test

Exit Decodes/Second and Decode Percent Tests

Cold Boot System from Boot Code

Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol

Activate Targeting System (Standard ID-06 only)

De-activate Targeting System (Standard ID-06 only)

Y-Modem Upload

Y-Modem Download (Image)

Y-Modem Download (Code)


7-3

Read Rate

Read Rate

Click the Utilities button and then the Read Rate tab to display the Read Rate view.

Read Rate information is displayed in the lower portion of the Utilities view.

Serial commands can also be sent to the imager from this screen.

To see the number of decodes per second, click the Decodes/sec radio button and then the Start button.

To see the percentage of decodes, click the Percent radio button and then the Start button.

To end a Read Rate test, click the Stop button (the Start button becomes a Stop button during an active Read Rate test.)

Important: When Read Rate is enabled, the


is not active,

regardless of how the imager is configured.

7-4


Utilities

Read Rate Serial Utility Commands

Enter Decodes / Second Test

Sending

<C>

instructs the imager to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data

(if any). The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view. This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the imager during setup.

Enter Decode Percent Test

Sending

<Cp>

instructs the imager to transmit the percentage of decodes and any decoded symbol data.

End Decodes / Second and Decode Percent Tests

Sending

<J>

ends both the Percent test and the Decodes/Second test.


7-5

Counters

Counters

Click the Utilities button and then the Counters tab to display the Counters view.

Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65535. After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65535, an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000. To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the rollover has occurred, add 65536 per each rollover (the imager does not keep track of the number of rollovers) to the current count.

Note: All counter values will be lost if power is cycled, or if the imager receives a Reset or

Save command.

Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set the counter to zero.

Trigger, Good Read, No

Read, and Mismatch counters can be requested and cleared simultaneously (Request

All and Clear All buttons) or individually (Request and Clear buttons to the left of each item).

7-6


Utilities

Counters Serial Utility Commands

No Read Counter

Sending

<N>

displays the total number of no reads that have occurred since power-on or the last No Read Counter Reset command. A <N/OVERF_nnn> will be output if the counter is overflowed (nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed; 255 times is the maximum). Sending

<N>

again will return the amount by which the counter has been overflowed.

Example: If the counter is at 999999999 and 3 additional counts have been captured, then

<N/ERROR> will be output and the next

<N>

command without any new no reads will return <N/000000003>.

No Read Counter Reset

Sending

<O>

sets the No Read Counter to 000000000.

Trigger Counter

Sending

<T>

displays the total number of triggers that have occurred since power-on or the last Trigger Counter Reset command. A <T/OVERF_nnn> will be output if the counter is overflowed (nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed; 255 times is the maximum). Sending

<T>



<T/ERROR> will be output and the next

<T>

command without any new triggers will return

<T/000000002>.

Trigger Counter Reset

Sending



sets the Trigger Counter to 000000000.

Good Read / Match Counter

Sending

<V>

displays either (1) the total number of decodes that match the master symbol or (2) the total number of good reads. The count begins from the last power-on or Good

Read / Match Counter Reset command. To count the good reads that match the master symbol, enable Matchcode. To count good reads only, disable Matchcode. This counter is always active and can be requested at any time. A <V/OVERF_nnn> will be output if the counter is overflowed (nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed; 255 times is the maximum). Sending

<V>



<V/ERROR> will be output and the next

<V>

command without any new good reads or matches will return <V/000000001>.

Good Read / Match Counter Reset

Sending

<W>

sets the Good Read / Match Counter to 000000000.


7-7

Counters

Mismatch Counter

Sending

<X>

displays the total number of symbols successfully decoded that do not match the master symbol since power-on or the last Mismatch Counter Reset command. A <X/

OVERF_nnn> will be output if the counter is overflowed (nnn represents the number of times it has been overflowed; 255 times is the maximum). Sending

<X>


Example: If the counter is at 999999999 and 1 additional count has been captured, then

<X/ERROR> will be output and the next

<X>

command without any new mismatches will return <X/000000001>.

Mismatch Counter Reset

Sending

<Y>

sets the Mismatch Counter to 000000000.

7-8


Device Control

Click the Utilities button and then the Device Control tab to display the Device Control view.

Utilities

The Output 1 Pulse, Output 2

Pulse, and Output 3 Pulse buttons activate the link between the + and – of the host connector. The buttons in the Extras section Disable or Enable the reader.

Device Control Serial Utility Commands

Output 1 Pulse

Sending

<L1>

activates the link between Output 1 (+) and Output 1 (–) of the host connector

(regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status).

Output 2 Pulse

Sending

<L2>



Output 3 Pulse

Sending

<L3>



Disable Reader

Sending



will turn the imager OFF, end the current read cycle, and will not allow the imager to enter another read cycle until turned ON. This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being decoded, or the imager is being configured.

Disabling the imager will not affect any commands that have already been downloaded.

Enable Reader

Sending

<H>

will turn the imager ON and allow it to enter read cycles.


7-9

Differences from Default

Differences from Default

Click the Utilities button and then the Differences tab to display the Differences from Default view.

Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause di-soric ID to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings. All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column (shown below), and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column.

Click this button for a list of di-

soric ID configuration settings that are different than default

Click Generate Barcode to display the Bar Code

Dialog. Then create configuration symbols containing the required configuration commands.

Send configuration settings to the imager without saving by clicking Send to Reader.

Click Save As to save the report as plain text or a tab-delimited text file.

Send configuration settings to the imager and save in di-soric ID by clicking Send and Save.

• To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table, click Generate

Barcode.

• To save the Differences from Default report, either as plain text or as a tab-delimited text file, click Save As.

• Click Send and Save to send the settings to the imager and save them, or Send to

Reader to send the settings without saving them.

Important: To use Differences from Default, connect to the imager and Receive

Reader Settings via the Send/Recv button on the toolbar.

7-10


Utilities

Master Database

Click the Utilities button and then the Master Database tab to display the Master Database view.

Important: The Master Database is used for all Matchcode modes except Sequential and Wild Card, both of which use Master Database Index # 1.

Master Database Overview

Used where more than one master symbol is required, as in a Multisymbol setup, for matching and other Matchcode operations.

Allows the user to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database, which can be entered by keyboard, scanned in, displayed, or deleted by serial or di-soric ID commands.

1. Click the Master Database tab.

2. Enable Matchcode Type.

3. Set the Master Symbol Database Size.

4. Select the database index in which the master symbol will be entered.

5. Do one of the following to enter master symbol data: a. Double-click the index row to type data directly into the index.

b. Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol.

Set Master Symbol

Database Size here.

Loads the next symbol decoded into the selected index.

Loads the imager’s saved master symbols into di-

soric ID.

Double-click a row to enter data into popup text box.

Saves the database to the imager.


7-11

Master Database

Master Symbol Database Size

Master Symbol Database Size allows the user to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database.

Set Master Symbol

Database Size here.

Important: Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol database is 3000, changes to the Master Symbol Database Size will re-allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted (except master symbol # 1, unless it also exceeds the size limitation).

The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according the number of master symbols defined, from 1 to 10.

Master Symbol

Number

# 1

# 2

# 3

# 4

# 5

# 6

# 7

# 8

# 9

# 10

Maximum

Characters

3000

1500

1000

750

600

500

428

375

333

300

7-12


Utilities

Enter Master Symbol Data

Allows the user to enter master symbol data for any enabled master symbol index number

(1 to 10), provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum allowed.

Enter data for 1 to 10 master symbols.

Caution: If no data is entered, the existing data will be deleted.

1. Open the Utilities menu.

2. Set the number of master symbols to be created in Master Symbol Database Size.

3. Double-click on each master symbol number in the table, type master symbol data in the popup dialog that appears, and click OK.

4. When all master symbol data has been entered, click the Send Database to the

Reader button.


7-13

Master Database

Request Master Symbol Data

Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10.

1. Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab.

2. Click the Receive Reader’s Database button.

Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol

After the size of the database is set, the imager can read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number.

<Gmaster symbol number>

To store the next symbol decoded as master symbol # 1, send:

<G>

or

<G1>

.

To store the next symbol decoded as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number, send:

<Gmaster symbol number [1-10]>

.

For example,

<G5>

will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol # 5.

In the Master Database tab,

1. Select the master symbol index number in which new symbol data will be stored.

2. Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index button.

Caution: If an index with existing data is selected, that data will be overwritten by the new decoded data when this command is used.

7-14


Utilities

Request New Master Status

Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in.

Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next read.

Send the

<NEWM>

command from di-soric ID’s Terminal.

The imager returns: <NEWM/next master to load>

Once a symbol has been read and loaded, the status will be cleared and the response will be <NEWM/0>.


7-15

Delete Master Symbol Data

Master symbol data can be deleted using di-soric ID.

1. Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol.

2. Click the Master Database tab and double-click the symbol number to be deleted.

3. Delete text and click OK.

7-16


Firmware

Click the Utilities button and then the Firmware tab to display the Firmware view.

Utilities

Firmware Update

Firmware Update is used to download application code to the imager. Application code versions are specific to the imager. Consult with a sales representative before downloading application code. If needed, application code can be requested from di-soric.

To download application code:

1. First, be sure that the imager is connected to the host computer.

2. Apply power to the imager.

3. In the Firmware Update dropdown menu, select App Code. This will open a dialog that allows the user to browse for the application code file.

4. Navigate to where the application code file is located on the host computer.

5. Allow approximately a minute for firmware to download.

As the application code begins to download, the imager will be silent, the LEDs will flash intermittently, and a progress indicator at the bottom of the di-soric ID window will show when the download is complete.

Caution: Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress.


7-17

Firmware

Firmware Verification

Request Part Number

Send a request to the imager for application code, boot code, DSP code, or kernel code part numbers.

1. Click the Firmware tab.

2. Select App Code, Boot Code, DSP Code, or Kernel Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request Part No. button.

3. Click the Request Part No. button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right.

Request Part Number by Serial Command

Note: X = base part number; R = revision number

• When

<#>

(a request for all part numbers) is sent, the imager returns:

<#a/35-XXXXXX-RR><#b/35-XXXXXX-RR><#d/35-XXXXXX-RR><#k/35-XXXXXX-RR>

<#p/Sys_Cfg_P/N><#s/SafeMode_P/N>.

• When

<#a>

(a request for the application code part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#a/35-XXXXXX-RR>.

• When

<#b>

(a request for the boot code part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#b/35-XXXXXX-RR>.

• When

<#d>

(a request for the DSP code part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#d/35-XXXXXX-RR>.

• When

<#k>

(a request for the kernel code part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#k/35-XXXXXX-RR>.

• When

<#p>

(a request for the system configuration file part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#p/Sys_Cfg_P/N>.

• When

<#s>

(a request for the SafeMode part number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#s/SafeMode_P/N>.

7-18


Utilities

Request Checksum

Send a request to the imager for application code or DSP code checksums.

1. Click the Firmware tab.

2. Select App Code or DSP Code from the dropdown menu to the left of the Request

Checksum button.

3. Click the Request Checksum button to see the part number displayed in the text field to the right.

Request Checksum by Serial Command

• When

<!>

(a request for all available firmware checksums) is sent, the imager returns:

<!a/APP_CHECKSUM><!d/DSP_CHECKSUM><!d/CFG_CHECKSUM>.

• When

<!a>

(a request for the application code checksum) is sent, the imager returns:

<!a/APP_CHECKSUM>.

• When

<!d>

(a request for the DSP code checksum) is sent, the imager returns:

<!d/DSP_CHECKSUM>.

• When

<!p>

(a request for the system configuration file checksum) is sent, the imager returns:

<!d/CFG_CHECKSUM>.


7-19

Firmware

Request Build Number by Serial Command

Note: X = base part number; R = revision number; B = build number

• When

<#.>

(a request for all part numbers) is sent, the imager returns:

<#a/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB><#b/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB><#d/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>

<#k/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB><#p/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

• When

<#a.>

(a request for the application code build number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#a/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

• When

<#b.>

(a request for the boot code build number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#b/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

• When

<#d.>

(a request for the DSP code build number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#d/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

• When

<#k.>

(a request for the kernel code build number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#k/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

• When

<#p.>

(a request for the system configuration file build number) is sent, the imager returns:

<#p/35-XXXXXX-RR.BBB>.

7-20


Utilities

Bar Code Configuration Mode

Definition:

Bar Code Configuration Mode is a way of programming the imager by using ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols.

Serial Cmd:

<

BCCFG

>

Bar Code Configuration Mode can be entered three different ways:

1. By forcing the imager into Bar Code Configuration Mode by serial command

<BCCFG>

.

2. By configuring one of the 4 EZ Button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode.

3. By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special code word used by ISO/IEC 16022 to signify imager programming. This can be either in a regular read cycle or during a read rate test. Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect.

1

Once Bar Code Configuration Mode has been entered, the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data. You can configure the imager by printing labels in di-soric’s serial command format. Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port. The imager will acknowledge the symbol with a beep, green flash, and echo the serial data to the host. If the command causes the imager to produce more serial output, such as serial verification or counter requests, the data will be routed to the host port.

Bar Code Configuration Mode can be exited by any reset

<A>

or

<Z>

command as well as a

<J>

or a quick press and release of the EZ Button.

The command to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode can be included as part of the Data

Matrix symbol. For example, try encoding

<K200,4><K220,1><J>

into a Data Matrix symbol.

This configures the imager to enable Serial Trigger Mode, to program a new trigger to end the read cycle, and to exit Bar Code Configuration Mode with

<J>

.


1. In normal reading modes, it is required to read a special Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by

ISO/IEC 16022 to signify imager programming.


7-21

Calibration

Calibration

Sending the

<@CAL>

command from di-soric ID’s Terminal initiates auto-calibration without entering the auto-calibration menu. The calibrated parameters are determined by the settings of the Calibration Options command.

Lens Calibration

Important: The

<@OPTIC>

command should only be used when changing the lens module.



Sending the

<@OPTIC>

command puts the imager into a setup mode for the purpose of improving the accuracy of the focal distance parameter (

<K525>

). The imager comes with a default focal curve based on unit averages. When this isn’t close enough to obtain all distances, the

<@OPTIC>

command can be used to start a 2-point test to normalize the focal distance and improve accuracy. This should generally be done with lenses that were not originally shipped with the imager.

Important: <K525>


The table below shows the setting and test requirements to improve distance parameter accuracy.

Lens Type and Command

<K525,,1> (.) UHD 15°

<K525,,2> (..) HD 30°

<K525,,3> (…) SD 45°

Inside Test Requirements

10 mil/0.25 mm Data Matrix @

1.0”/25 mm


1.0”/25 mm


1.0”/25 mm

Outside Test Requirements


10”/254 mm


10”/254 mm


10”/254 mm

7-22


Utilities


Understanding and controlling the imager’s active, saved, and default settings is critical to its successful operation.

Function

Serial

Cmd di-soric ID a

EZ Button

Reset (Will not save for power-on) <

A

>

Save to Reader,

Send No Save

No

Reset and Recall di-soric Default

Parameters

Reset and Recall Power-On Parameters

Reset and Recall Customer Default

Parameters

<

<

<

Ard

Arp

Arc

>

>

>

Send <

Send <

Send <

Ard

Arp

Arc

> from Terminal

> from Terminal

> from Terminal

No

No

No

Save Current Settings for Power-On

Save Current Settings as Customer

Default Parameters for Power-On

<

<

Z

Zc

>

>

Save to Reader,

Send and Save

Save to Reader,

Send and Save Customer

Defaults for Power-On b

No

No

Recall di-soric Default Settings and

Save for Power-On (Will not default

“sticky parameters”)

Recall di-soric Default Settings,

Default “Sticky Parameters”, and

Save for Power-On

<

<

Zrd

>

ZRDall

>

Send <

Send <

Zrd

> from Terminal

ZRDall

> from Terminal

No

No

Recall Customer Default Settings and Save for Power-On

<

Zrc

> Send <

Zrc

> from Terminal

Press and hold while powering on imager a. When right-clicking in a tree control to select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All di-

soric ID Settings, it is important to note that only di-soric ID settings are defaulted. To save these defaults to the imager itself, follow up with a Save to Reader, Send and Save command.

b. Only available in di-soric ID if enabled in Preferences (General tab), accessible from the Options dropdown menu.

Resets

Resets (“

A

” commands) affect only the current settings (active memory) and are not saved for power-on.

Saved for Power-on

Power-on parameters (“

Z

” commands) are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled to the imager or the

<Arp>

command is issued.

Defaults

Defaults are di-soric firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled, either by software or hardware reset.


7-23

Default/Reset/Save

Customer Default Parameters

Customer default parameters (saved by

<Zc>

) are the same set of parameters as power-on parameters but are saved in a different, isolated section of NOVRAM. This allows a user essentially to create a back-up set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power-on parameters have been accidentally changed or are no longer desired.

It is important to note that a hardware default (jumper the default pin to ground) does not affect customer default parameters. For example, a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a

<Z>

command, may not know the correct settings or have the capability to communicate within those settings. By first doing an EZ

Button default to restore the known di-soric defaults, the user can then recall the previous customer-saved settings with an

<Arc>

or

<Zrc>

command.

Restore Customer Defaults

Use the EZ Button to default the scanner by holding it down while applying power to the scanner (if this feature is enabled).

di-soric Default Parameters

di-soric default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed.

Software Defaults

di-soric default parameters can be recalled (loaded into current settings) with the

<Ard>

command or recalled and saved for power-on with the

<Zrd>

command.

Hardware Default

If a software default and reset is not possible, it may be necessary to reset the imager by shorting (connecting) specific pins. This procedure has the same effect as the

<Zrd>

software command.

Important: For this reset to occur, this command must be executed within 60 seconds of a power-on or a reset.

1. Apply power to the imager.

2. Locate default pin and ground.

3. Momentarily connect the default and ground wires (or pins) and listen for a series of short beeps.

4. Within 3 seconds, connect them again. A longer beep should be heard. If not, repeat the process.


Use the EZ Button to default the imager by holding it down while applying power to the imager (if this feature is enabled).

7-24


Utilities

Imager Status

<?>

Imager Status Request

The imager responds to a status request

<?>

with a two character hex value, such as <?/22>.

To determine status:

1. Look up the binary conversion in the table below.

For example, the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary, as read from binary digits 3 through 0; the second hex 2 is also 0 0 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4.

2. Next, enter your binary values from the table below in the

“Binary” column next to the appropriate bit.

Hex

Value

Binary

Bit Digits

7

6 5 4

3

4

5

Bit Binary

0 0

1

2

1

0

0

0

1

Imager Status

Command error detected

Command received

Communication error detected

Flash sector unprotect failure

Host/Aux port buffer overflow

Imager is in a read cycle

3. Under “Binary,” interpret 1s as true and 0s as not true. For example, bit 1 has a 1 in the “Binary” column, indicating

“Command Received”. Bit 5 is also a 1, indicating that the

“Imager is in a read cycle”.

C

D

E

F

A

B

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

3 2 1 0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

<K?> All Status Request

This is the fastest way to learn the imager’s current configuration. Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands, starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value.

<K??> All Descriptor Request

This request will return all current descriptors for every K command, starting with the lowest

K command value and ending with the highest K command value.

<K?#> All Range Request

This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user-defined range, starting with the lowest user-defined K command value and ending with the highest user-defined K command value.


7-25

Imager Status

<Knnn?> Single Status Request

This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command.

The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command.

<Knnn??> Single Descriptor Request

This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command.

<Knnn?#> Single Range Request

This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command.

<Knnnd> Single Command Default

This request will default a single K command to original factory parameters.

7-26


Utilities

Learn Operations

Learn

Sending the

<LEARN>

command from di-soric ID’s Terminal will put the imager into a mode of operation that will cause it to “learn” the next Data Matrix symbol decoded. This mode of operation will remain active until either a Data Matrix symbol is decoded or the call is made to disable the mode and revert back to normal operation. Upon decoding a

Data Matrix symbol, the image processing will save pertinent information regarding the target symbol to allow it to be processed more quickly and consistently.

The data collected by the Learn operation can be saved for a Power-On condition by sending the

<Z>

command.

Unlearn

Sending the

<UNLEARN>

command will cause the imager to discard any information acquired during a Learn operation.

The Unlearn state can be saved for a Power-On condition by sending the

<Z>

command.

Learn Status

Sending the

<LEARN?>

request will return the current status of Learn operations.

Responses are sent in this format:

<LEARN,0>

(Default; symbol has not been learned.)

<LEARN,1>

(Learn operation in progress.)

<LEARN,2>

(Symbol has been learned.)

Learn Persistence

The learn state and parameters persist in the same way as ordinary parameters.

Examples:

• A ID-06 in a Learned state has not been saved. Cycling power will remove any Learned state information and the imager will power-on in its configured state.

• A ID-06 is saved in a Learning state. The imager will power-on in the Learning state and will learn the first Data Matrix symbol decoded.

• A ID-06 is saved in a Learned state. The imager will power-on in the Learned state and will only decode the learned symbol type.

• A ID-06 in a Learned state is issued a reset default command

<Ard>

. The unit will return to an Unlearned state but if power is cycled it will return to its saved state.


7-27

Reboot System

Reboot System

Sending a

<reboot>

command from di-soric ID’s Terminal will “cold-reboot” the system, starting from Boot Code.

7-28


Utilities


Sending a

<VAL>

command from di-soric ID’s Terminal will cause the imager to perform a static validation operation and will output validation results to the Terminal.

Output Screen

Data Matrix validation information is output in the format below in response to the

<VAL>

command.

Note: If the imager fails to decode the Data Matrix symbol, a No Read message is displayed.

Validation Parameters

Symbol Contrast

Usage:

Definition:

Lets the user know if contrast settings are less than acceptable.

All the pixels that fall within the area of the test symbol, including its required zone, will be sorted by their reflectance values to select the darkest 10% and the lightest 10% of the pixels. The arithmetic mean of the darkest and the lightest pixels is calculated and the difference of the two means is the Symbol Contrast.

(ANSI) Symbol Contrast grading is defined this way:

A (4.0) if SC ≥ 70%

B (3.0) if SC ≥ 55%

C (2.0) if SC ≥ 40%

D (1.0) if SC ≥ 20%

F (0.0) if SC ≤ 20%


7-29

Static Validation

Print Growth

Definition:

The extent to which dark or light markings appropriately fill or exceed their module boundaries. These values are determined by counting pixels in the clock pattern of the binary digitized image, then comparing it to a nominal value and minimum and maximum values. The grade is defined in this way:

A (4.0) if -.050 ≤ PG ≤ 0.50

B (3.0) if -.070 ≤ PG ≤ 0.70

C (2.0) if -.085 ≤ PG ≤ 0.85

D (1.0) if -.100 ≤ PG ≤ 1.00

F (0.0) if PG < -1.00 or PG > 1.00

Axial Non-Uniformity (Data Matrix Only)

Definition:

Axial non-uniformity is a measure of how much the sampling point spacing differs from one axis to another, namely

AN = abs (XAVG - YAVG) / ((XAVG + YAVG)/2) where abs ( ) yields the absolute value. If a symbology has more than two major axes, then AN is computed for those two average spacings which differ the most. The grade is defined in this way:

A (4.0) if AN ≤ .06

B (2.0) if AN ≤ .08

C (2.0) if AN ≤ .10

D (1.0) if AN ≤ .12

F (0.0) if AN ≥ .12

Unused Error Correction (Data Matrix Only)

Definition:

The correction capacity of Reed-Solomon decoding is expressed in the equation: e + 2d ≤ d - p where e is the number of erasures, t is the number of errors, d is the number of error correction codewords, and p is the number of codewords reserved for error detection.

The Unused Error Correction parameter tests the extent to which regional or spot damage in the symbol has eroded the decoding safety margin that error correction provides. The grade is defined in this way:

A (4.0) if UEC ≥ .62

B (3.0) if UEC ≥ .50

C (2.0) if UEC ≥ .37

D (1.0) if UEC ≥ .25

F (0.0) if UEC ≤ .25

7-30


Utilities

Targeting

Activate Targeting System

Sending a

<l1>

command (lower-case L and numeral 1) from di-soric ID’s Terminal activates the imager’s targeting system.

Important: <l1>


De-activate Targeting System

Sending a

<l0>

command (lower-case L and numeral 0) de-activates the imager’s targeting system.

Important: <l0>



7-31

Y-Modem Transfer Options

Y-Modem Transfer Options

Y-Modem Upload

<

uy,

path and image file name>

Note: There are only three scales available from the imager. The three scales are full, quarter, and eighth. The Directory response will read out the image dimensions. To receive the image, request to download by the reported dimensions. If quarter-scaled or eighth-scaled images are required, then divide the dimensions by 4 or by 8 and request by the reduced dimensions.

(1.) Directory

(None assumes root)

/ (Root Directory)

/saved (Saved Directory)

(2.) Image Status

Good/ (IP decoded a symbol)

No Read/ (IP did not decode a symbol)

Mismatch/ (IP decoded the wrong symbol)

Pending/ (Not run through IP)

(3.) Age

0 to n n = Max Images (8 ≤ Max)

(4.) Image Name (Full-Scale)

1280 x 1024.bmp

1280 x 1024_gs.bmp

1280 x 1024.jpg

1280 x 1024_q(1-100).jpg

Valid Scales (Depends on Full Dimensions)

1280 x 1024 (Full)

320 x 256 (Quarter - divide by 4)

160 x 128 (Eighth - divide by 8)

(5.) Type

.bmp (Bitmap image - no loss of resolution)

.jpg (JPEG image - loss of resolution with compression)

JPEG Compression Quality (1-100%)

_q1.jpg

_q100.jpg

Examples: <uy,/saved/noread/2/320x256_gs.bmp> <uy,/saved/noread/2/320x256_q33.jpg>

7-32


Y-Modem Download (Code)

<

dy,

key>

Key

app.bin

dsp.bin

ker.bin

Note: The “key” field only accepts app.bin, dsp.bin, or ker.bin.

Utilities


7-33

Y-Modem Transfer Options

7-34


A

ppendices

Contents

Appendix A General Specifications ..............................................................................................A-2

Appendix B Electrical Specifications .......................................................................................... A-11

Appendix C Ground and Shield Considerations......................................................................... A-20

Appendix D Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts................................................................................... A-22

Appendix E Serial Commands ................................................................................................... A-23

Appendix F Protocol Commands................................................................................................ A-78

Appendix G ASCII Table ............................................................................................................ A-87

Appendix H Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP .................................................................................. A-88

Appendix I Using EtherNet/IP..................................................................................................... A-91

Appendix J Allen-Bradley PLC Setup....................................................................................... A-100

Appendix K Interface Standards............................................................................................... A-121

Appendix L Glossary of Terms ................................................................................................. A-122


A-1

General Specifications

Appendix A — General Specifications

Mechanical (Standard ID-06)

Height: 1.59" (40.5 mm)

Width: 2.27" (57.6 mm)

Depth: 3.79" (96.3 mm)

Weight: 10 oz. (280 g)

Mechanical (ID-06 C-Mount)

Height: 4.03" (102.3 mm)

Width: 2.27" (57.6 mm)

Depth: 1.59" (40.5 mm)

Weight: 11 oz. (320 g)

Environmental

Enclosure: Die-cast aluminum, IP65/67 rated

Operating Temperature: 0° to 50° C (32° to

122° F)

Storage Temperature: –29° to 70° C (–20° to

158° F)

Humidity: up to 90% (non-condensing)

Communication Interface

Standard Interfaces: RS-232, RS-422, RS-485,

Ethernet

CE Mark

General Immunity for Light Industry: EN

55024:1998 ITE Immunity Standard

Radiated and Conducted Emissions of ITE

Equipment: EN 55022:98 ITE Disturbances

Light Source (Standard ID-06)

Type: High-output LEDs

Symbologies

2D Symbologies: Data Matrix (ECC 0-200), QR

Code, Micro QR Code, Aztec Code

Stacked Symbologies: PDF417,

MicroPDF417, GS1 DataBar (Composite and

Stacked)

Linear Symbologies: Code 39, Code 128,

BC412, Interleaved 2 of 5, UCP/EAN, Codabar,

Code 93, Pharmacode, Postal Symbologies

Read Parameters

Pitch: ±30°

Skew: ±30°

Note: Nominal dimensions shown. Typical tolerances apply.

Tilt: ±360°

CMOS Decode Rate: Up to 60 decodes per second

ID-06 Dimensions

CCD Decode Rate: Up to 20 decodes per second

Focal Range (Standard ID-06): 1” (33 mm) to ∞ (liquid lens autofocus)

Indicators

LEDs: Read performance, power, read status, network activity, I/O

Green Flash (Standard ID-06): Good Read

Red X (Standard ID-06): Symbol Locator

Beeper: Good Read, Match/Mismatch, No Read, serial command confirmation, On/Off

A-2


Light Collection Options

Progressive scan, square pixel.

Shutter: Software-adjustable 1/60 to 1/100,000 (CMOS);

1/30 to 1/100,000 (CCD)

CMOS (WVGA): 752 x 480 pixels

CCD (SXGA): 1280 x 960 pixels

Laser Light (Standard ID-06)

Type: Laser diode

Output Wavelength: 655 nm nominal

Operating Life: 50,000 hours @ 25° C

Safety Class: Visible laser: Class 1

Protocols

Point-to-Point, Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS, Point-to-Point with

XON/XOFF, Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF, Multidrop,

Daisy Chain, User-Defined Multidrop, Ethernet TCP/IP, EtherNet/IP

Electrical

Standard ID-06 CMOS Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV pp max ripple, 135 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

Standard ID-06 CCD Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 170 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

ID-06 C-Mount CMOS Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 105 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

ID-06 C-Mount CCD Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 130 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

Discrete I/O

Input 1/Trigger/New Master: Bi-directional, Optoisolated, 4.5–28V rated (13 mA at 24VDC); New Master is (–) to signal ground

Outputs (1, 2, 3): Bi-directional, Optoisolated, 1–28V rated (I

CE mA at 24VDC, current limited by user)

< 100

Appendices


Note: Nominal dimensions shown.

Typical tolerances apply.

ID-06 C-Mount Dimensions

A-3


Safety Certifications

CDRH, FCC, UL/cUL (Listed, UL60950 4K68), CE, CB, BSMI (compliant)

RoHS/WEEE Compliant

ISO 9001 Registered Company

©2011 di-soric GmbH & Co. KG

All rights reserved. Specifications subject to change.

Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25°C (77°F) using grade A labels. Performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes. Warranty–One year limited warranty on parts and labor. Extended warranty available.

A-4


VSID-ID-ES Interface Device

Mechanical

Height: .75" (19.1 mm)

Width: 2.50" (83.5 mm)

Depth: 3.15" (80 mm)

Weight: 7 oz. (200 g)

Appendices

VSID-ID-ES


A-5


Read Ranges (Standard ID-06)

Note: Ranges correspond to specific symbol element sizes, and range increases as element size increases.

CMOS Modular Zoom Optics: Inches (mm)

15°

1D

Narrow Bar Width

2D

0.0033 (0.08) 0.005 (0.13)

0.0075 (0.19) 0.010 (0.25)

0.015 (0.38)

0.035 (0.89)

0.066 (1.68)

0.020 (0.51)

0.050 (1.27)

0.100 (2.54)

Read Range

(using autofocus)

1 to 6 (25 to 152)

1 to 14 (25 to 356)

2 to 29 (51 to 737)

3 to 60 (76 to 1,524)

6 to 96 (152 to 2,438)

Field of View

Inside Edge

Depth of Field

Outside Edge Inside Edge Outside Edge

0.53 (13)

0.53 (13)

1.8 (46)

3.5 (89)

0.2 (5)

0.8 (20)

0.8 (20)

2.5 (64)

0.53 (13)

1.03 (26)

1.08 (27)

7.5 (191)

15.5 (394)

25 (635)

1.5 (38)

7 (178)

9 (229)

9 (229)

50 (1,270)

65 (1,651)

30°


1D 2D

0.0033 (0.08) 0.005 (0.13)

0.0075 (0.19) 0.010 (0.25)

0.015 (0.38) 0.020 (0.51)

0.035 (0.89) 0.050 (1.27)

Read Range


1 to 3 (25 to 76)

1 to 6.5 (25 to 165)

1 to 16 (25 to 406)

2 to 32 (51 to 813)

45°

1D


2D

0.0075 (0.19) 0.010 (0.25)

0.015 (0.38)

0.035 (0.89)

0.020 (0.51)

0.050 (1.27)

Read Range


1 to 5 (25 to 127)

1 to 9.5 (25 to 241)

1 to 23.5 (25 to 597)

CCD Modular Zoom Optics: Inches (mm)

15°


1D

0.002 (0.05)

2D

0.0033 (0.08)

Read Range


1 to 6 (25 to 152)

0.005 (0.13)

0.010 (0.25)

0.020 (0.51)

0.040 (1.02)

0.0075 (0.19) 1 to 14 (25 to 356)

0.015 (0.38)

0.030 (0.76)

0.060 (1.52)

2 to 29 (51 to 737)

3 to 60 (76 to 1,524)

6 to 96 (152 to 2,438)

Field of View

Inside Edge

0.83 (21)

0.83 (21)

0.83 (21)

1.3 (33)

Depth of Field

Outside Edge Inside Edge

1.8 (46)

3.5 (89)

8.3 (211)

16.4 (417)

0.4 (10)

0.8 (20)

2 (51)

3 (76)

Outside Edge

0.8 (20)

1.8 (46)

8.5 (216)

21.5 (546)

Field of View

Inside Edge

Depth of Field


1.3 (33) 4.1 (104) 1.5 (38) 2 (51)

1.3 (33)

1.3 (33)

7.5 (191)

18.3 (465)

2 (51)

3.8 (97)

6 (152)

19 (483)

Field of View

Inside Edge

Depth of Field


0.53 (13) 1.8 (46) 0.2 (5) 0.8 (20)

0.53 (13)

0.53 (13)

1.03 (26)

1.08 (27)

3.5 (89)

7.5 (191)

15.5 (394)

25 (635)

0.8 (20)

1.5 (38)

7 (178)

9 (229)

2.5 (64)

9 (229)

50 (1,270)

65 (1,651)

30°


1D

0.002 (0.05)

2D

0.0033 (0.08)

Read Range


1 to 3 (25 to 76)

0.005 (0.13) 0.0075 (0.19) 1 to 6.5 (25 to 165)

0.010 (0.25)

0.020 (0.51)

0.015 (0.38)

0.030 (0.76)

1 to 16 (25 to 406)

2 to 32 (51 to 813)

45°

1D


2D

0.005 (0.13)

0.010 (0.25)

0.020 (0.51)

0.0075 (0.19)

0.015 (0.38)

0.030 (0.76)

Read Range


1 to 5 (25 to 127)

1 to 9.5 (25 to 241)

1 to 23.5 (25 to 597)

Field of View

Inside Edge

Depth of Field


0.83 (21)

0.83 (21)

1.8 (46)

3.5 (89)

0.4 (10)

0.8 (20)

0.8 (20)

1.8 (46)

0.83 (21)

1.3 (33)

8.3 (211)

16.4 (417)

2 (51)

3 (76)

8.5 (216)

21.5 (546)

Field of View

Inside Edge

Depth of Field


1.3 (33)

1.3 (33)

1.3 (33)

4.1 (104)

7.5 (191)

18.3 (465)

1.5 (38)

2 (51)

3.8 (97)

2 (51)

6 (152)

19 (483)

A-6


Read Ranges (cont.)

Appendices


A-7


Options

ID-06-IM2-15-ES

ID-06-IM2-30-ES

ID-06-IM2-45-ES

ID-06-IM2-00-ES

ID-06-IC3-15-ES

ID-06-IC3-30-ES

ID-06-IC3-45-ES

ID-06-IC3-00-ES

ID-06, Industrial Imager, CMOS, 15 Degree Optic, Ethernet



ID-06, Industrial Imager, CMOS, C-Mount Optic, Ethernet

ID-06, Industrial Imager, CCD, 15 Degree Optic, Ethernet



ID-06, Industrial Imager, CCD, C-Mount Optic, Ethernet

Accessories

Power Supplies

VSID-PS-24V-ES Power Supply, M12 12-pin Socket, 1.3 m

Communication Devices and Cables

VKHM-Z-1/12/DB9-K Cordset, Host, Serial M12 12 pin Socket (Screw-on) to DB9 Socket, 1M

VKHM-Z-3/12/DB9-K Cordset, Host, Serial, M12 12 pin Socket (Screw-on) to DB9 Socket, 3M

Other Accessories

VSID-BW-004

VSID-R90-002

VSID-W-K-00

VSID-L-S-15

L-Bracket Kit

Right Angle Mirror Kit

Window Replacement Kit

15° Lens Kit

VSID-L-S-30

VSID-L-S-45

VSID-W-G-850

VSID-W-G-000

VSID-LD-C-5

VSID-LD-C-KIT

VSID-POL-25.5

VSID-LP-C-48

VSID-LP-C-72

30° Lens Kit

45° Lens Kit

Glass Window Kit with Infrared (IR) Filter

Glass Window Kit

5MM Extension Tube for C-Mount Lenses

Lens Extension Tube Set 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 20, 40mm

Polarizing Filter 25.5mm Thread

Lens Protection Housing, Standard Length (up to 48mm)

Lens Protection Housing, Long (up to 72mm)

A-8


Appendices

Appendix B — Electrical Specifications

Standard ID-06 Power

Requirement

ID-06 C-Mount Power

Requirement

CMOS Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 135 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

CCD Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 170 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

CMOS Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 105 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

CCD Power Requirement: 5-28VDC, 200 mV p-p max ripple, 130 mA at 24VDC (typ.)

ID-06 Connectors

New Master

Output 1

Output 2

Default

Power

Output 3

RS-232

(Host) TxD

Trigger

Ground

Input Common

Output Common

RS-232 (Host) RxD

A (All Models) M12 12-pin Plug

6

7

4

5

8

9

Pin Function

1

2

3

Power

Default

Wire Color

Trigger White

Brown

Green

New Master

Output 1

Output 3

Ground

Yellow

Gray

Pink

Blue

Input Common Red

RS-232 (Host) RxD Black

10 RS-232 (Host) TxD Violet

11 Output 2 Gray/Pink

12 Output Common Red/Blue

Continued next page

A is a serial M12 12-pin plug. It is the same for all models of the ID-06.

B is a serial M12 12-pin socket for serial models and an Ethernet M12 8-pin socket for Ethernet models.


A-9

Electrical Specifications

ID-06 and VSID-ID-ES Connectors and Pinouts (continued)

Ground

RS-422/485 RxD (–)

Input

Common

RS-232 TxD/

RS-232 RTS

Trigger TX (+)

Terminated

RX (–)

Terminated

RS-422/485

RxD (+)

RS-232 RxD/

RS-232 CTS

Power

RS-422/485

TxD (+)

Input 1

Terminated

RS-422/485 TxD (–)

B (Serial Models) M12 12-pin Socket

6

7

4

5

8

9

Pin Function

1

2

3

Trigger

Power

Terminated

Input 1

Port 3 422/485 TxD (+)

Port 3 422/485 RxD (+)

Ground

Input Common

Port 2 TxD/Port 1 RTS

10 Port 2 RxD/Port 1 CTS

11 Port 3 422/485 TxD (–)

12 Port 3 422/485 RxD (–)

Wire Color

White

Brown

Green

Yellow

Gray

Pink

Blue

Red

Black

Violet

Gray/Pink

Red/Blue

RX (+)

Terminated

TX (–)

Terminated

B (Ethernet Models) M12 8-pin Socket

6

7

4

5

8

Pin Function

1

2

3

Terminated

Terminated

Terminated

TX (–)

RX (+)

TX (+)

Terminated

RX (–)

A-10


Appendices

VSID-ID-ES Connectors

Connector T on the VSID-ID-ES Interface Device is the Trigger connector.

Connectors 1, 2, and 3 can be used to bus power and data as required by the application.

The connectors on the VSID-ID-ES interface device physically mirror those on the ID-06 imager, but they do not have explicit pin assignments. The VSID-ID-ES connectors take on the communications and power roles that are assigned to them.

Trigger

Ground +10-28V

1 +10-28V

Trigger/New Master / Input 1 Common

VSID-ID-ES Trigger Connector 4-pin Socket

3 Ground

4 Trigger

Power Switch

Trigger Switch

VSID-ID-ES Wiring

Connectors 1 and 3 are 12-pin plugs, and Connector 2 is a 12-pin socket. All three connectors can be assigned to bus power and data.

The two switches at the center of the device allow the user to route signals as needed.

The simple diagram above (also shown on the base of the VSID-ID-ES) illustrates how power, communications, I/O, and trigger signal can be routed through the VSID-ID-ES device.

Power can be bussed between imagers and interface devices. At each location on a network where a new power supply is added, the Power switch on the VSID-ID-ES can be used to break power between Connector 2 and Connectors 1, 3, and T.

The Trigger signal between Connector 2 and Connectors 1, 3, and T can be broken


A-11


Optoisolated Outputs

The reader has optoisolated outputs that can transfer signals from the reader to peripherals.

Outputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP, but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system, because the output common is shared by all outputs.

NPN Output for Host Input

NPN Output for External Load

A-12


Appendices


A-13


PNP Output for Host Input

A-14


PNP Output for External Load

Appendices


A-15


Optoisolated Inputs

All discrete inputs are optoisolated. Inputs can be configured as either NPN or PNP, but NPN and PNP cannot be mixed in a system, because the input common is shared by all inputs.

NPN

A-16


PNP

Appendices


A-17


Output Wiring

A-18


Appendices

Appendix C — Ground and Shield Considerations

Proper grounding is necessary for operator safety, noise reduction, and the protection of equipment from voltage transients. Buildings, including any steelwork, all circuits, and all junction boxes must be grounded directly to an earth ground in compliance with local and national electrical codes.

ID-06

An earth ground is provided through the cable shields and chassis of the imager.

Ground Loops

Ground loops (signal degradation due to different ground potentials in communicating devices) can be eliminated or minimized by ensuring that both the host, imager, and their power supplies are connected to a common earth ground.


A-19

Ground and Shield Considerations

Expected Power and Ground Connections for Proper Operation

Notes:

• Ensure that mounting bracket “Earth” is at the same potential as power source “Earth”.

• Supply “Return” and “Earth” ground must be stable, low-impedance reference points.

• “2-Terminal Power Supply” must still provide an “Earth” connection to the imager.

• “Signal Ground” can be used for communications and/or discrete signal ground reference.

It must not be used as Power Ground or Earth Ground.

A-20


Appendices

Appendix D — Flying Lead Cordset Pinouts

di-soric offers two flying leads cordsets—for use in hardware configurations. The diagrams below show the correspondence of wire colors to pins.

Cordset, M12 12-Pin Plug, Flying Leads

The cordset connects to ID-06 Connector B (serial) and VSID-ID-ES Connector 2.

Cordset, M12 12-Pin Socket, Flying Leads

The cordset connects to ID-06 Connectors A and P/M, and VSID-ID-ES Connectors 1 and 3.


A-21

Serial Commands

Appendix E — Serial Commands

Note: For a list of utility commands such as defaults, read rate requests, device control options, and imager status requests, see


.

Communication

RS-232 A

RS-232 B

RS-422

Ethernet

Ethernet TCP Ports

Search and Configure Mode

RS-232 A Data Type

RS-232 B Data Type

RS-422 Data Type

Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type


Preamble

Postamble

Response Timeout

LRC Status

ACK/NAK Options

Polling Mode Options

Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain

Protocol Selection

External Data Routing

Array Communication Modes

Read Cycle

Trigger / Trigger Filter Duration

Serial Trigger Character

External Trigger State

End of Read Cycle

Decodes Before Output

Multisymbol

Serial Trigger Start Character

Serial Trigger Stop Character

Capture Mode

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

<

K101,

status,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

<

K102,


<

K126,

status,IP address,subnet,gateway,IP address mode>

<

K127,

TCP Port 1,TCP Port 2>

<

K128,

di-soric ID Search and Configure Mode>

<

K130,

symbol data output,extra symbol information,diagnostic

output,external source processing mode>

<

K131,



<

K132,



<

K133,



<

K134,



<

K141,

status,preamble>

<

K142,

status,postamble>

<

K143,

response timeout>

<

K145,

status>

<

K147,

RES,REQ,STX,ETX,ACK,NAK>

<

K148,


<

K150

DAISY>

<

K160,

protocol,address,protocol port>

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,echo to

source,output at end of read cycle,output at ETX,output at timeout>

<

K162,

mode,source,daisy chain i.d. status,daisy chain i.d.>

<

K200,

trigger mode,leading edge trigger filter duration,trailing

edge trigger filter duration>

<

K201,

serial trigger character>

<

K202,

external trigger state>

<

K220,

mode,read cycle timeout>

<

K221,

number before output>

<

K222,

number of symbols,multisymbol separator>

<

K229,

start character>

<

K230,

stop character>

<

K241,

mode,number of captures,rapid capture mode>

A-22


Appendices

Capture Time

Store No Read Image

Image Processing Timeout

Number of Symbols in Field of View

Configuration Database

Number of Active Indexes

<

K242,

time before first capture,time between 1-2,time between

2-3,time between 3-4,time between 4-5,time between 5-6,time

between 6-7,time between 7-8>

<

<

<

K244,

K245,

K518,

image storage type,image storage mode>

image processing timeout>

number of symbols in field of view>

Configuration Database (Standard ID-06)

Configuration Database (ID-06 C-Mount)

<

K252,

number of active indexes,sort database>

<

K255,

index,shutter speed,gain,focal distance,sub-sampling,row pointer,column pointer,row depth,column width,symbol type,morphology

operation,morphology size>

<

K255,

index,shutter speed,gain,unused,sub-sampling,row

pointer,column pointer,unused,column width,unused,unused,unused>

Load Current Setting from Configuration

Database

Request Database Index Setting

Request All Database Settings

Database Mode

<

<

<

K255–,

K255?,

K255?

> index> index>

<

K256,

switch mode,frame count/time,image process looping,

image dimensions>

Symbologies

Composite

Aztec

Micro QR Code

Postal Symbologies

Code 39

Codabar

Interleaved 2 of 5

UPC/EAN

Code 128 / EAN 128

Code 93

PDF417

Pharmacode

Data Matrix

QR Code

<

K453,

symbology status,separator status,separator>

<

K458,

status>

<

K459,

status>

<

K460,

postal type,POSTNET status, PLANET status,USPS4CB

status,POSTNET allow B and B’ fields,Australia Post allow 0 FCC>

<

K470,

status,check character status,check character output status, large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,full ASCII set>

<

K471,

status,start/stop match status,start/stop output status, large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,check character type,check character output status>

<

K472,

status,check character status,check character output status,

symbol length 1,symbol length 2,guard bar,range mode status>

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator

status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E as UPC-A>

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,

EAN status,output format,application record separator status, application record separator character,application record brackets,

application record padding>

<

K475,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K476,

status,unused,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,unused,codeword collection>

<

K477,

status,fixed bar count status,fixed bar count,minimum bar

count,bar width mode,direction,fixed threshold value,background>

<

K479,

ECC 200 status,ECC 000 status,ECC 050 status,ECC

080 status,ECC 100 status,ECC 140 status,ECC 120 status>

<

K480,

status>


A-23

Serial Commands

BC412

DataBar Omnidirectional

DataBar Limited

DataBar Expanded

MicroPDF417

Camera Setup

Window of Interest

Focus Distance

Illumination (Standard ID-06 Only)

Camera Settings

Sub-Sampling

Morphological Pre-Processing

Morphological Operations

External Illumination Mode

I/O Parameters

Calibration Options (Standard ID-06)

Calibration Options (ID-06 C-Mount)

Serial Verification

Beeper

Quality Output

Symbol Data Output

Read Duration Output

Global Symbol Quality Output

ISO/IEC 16022 Parameters

Data Matrix Grading

No Read Message

Input 1

Frame Information

ISO/IEC 16022 Grade LED Display

Green Flash LED

Status Indicators

EZ Trax Output

Database Identifier Output

EZ Button

EZ Button Modes

<

K481,

status,check character output,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length>

<

K482,

status>

<

K483,

status>

<

K484,


<

K485,

status,unused,fixed length status,fixed symbol length>

<

K516,

row pointer,column pointer,row depth,column width>

<

K525,

focal distance,distance units,lens type>

<

K539,

mode,brightness>

<

K541,

shutter speed,gain>

<

K542,

sub-sampling>

<

K550,

status>

<

K551,

unused,operation,size>

<

K553,

mode>

<

K529,

gain,shutter speed,focus position,symbol type,window of

interest framing,window of interest margin>

<

K529,

gain,shutter speed,unused,symbol type,unused,unused>

<

K701,

serial command echo status, serial command beep status,

control/hex output>

<

K702,

status>

<

K704,

quality output separator, decodes per trigger status>

<

K705,

symbol data output status, when to output symbol data>

<

K706,

status,separator>

<

K708,

quality output separator,output mode>

<

K709,

symbol contrast,print growth,axial non-uniformity,unused

ECC>

<

K710,

percent cell damage,total read time,capture time,locate time,decode time,pixels per element,ECC level,matrix size,quiet

zone,symbol angle>

<

K714,

status,message>

<

K730,

input mode,active state>

<

K734,

output frame number,output coordinates>

<

K737,

unused,LED AIM LED display>

<

K750,

LED status,targeting status,green flash duration>

<

K751,

comm,bar graph,I/O 1,I/O 2>

<

K757,

status,port,image mode,image format,image quality,

object info enable,grade enable>

<

K759,

status,separator character>

<

K770,

global status,default on power-on,load configuration database,

save for power-on>

<

K771,

first beep,second beep,third beep,fourth beep>>

A-24


Trend Analysis Output 1



Diagnostics Output 1



Symbol Quality Output 1



Output 1 Parameters

Output 2 Parameters

Output 3 Parameters

Matchcode

Matchcode

Master Symbol Database Size

New Master Pin

Master Symbol

Match Replace

Mismatch Replace

Diagnostics

Hours Since Reset (Read-only)

Service Message

User-Defined Name

Output Format

Format Extract

Format Insert

Format Assign

Output Format Status

Output Filter Configuration

Output Filter Enable


Appendices

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,number of triggers,number to output

on,decodes per trigger>

<

K781,



<

K782,



<

K790,

unused,service unit>

<

K791,


<

K792,


<

K800,

Output on Symbol Contrast,Symbol Contrast Threshold,

Output on Print Growth,Print Growth Threshold,Output on Axial

Non-Uniformity,Axial Non-Uniformity Threshold,Output on

Unused ECC,Unused ECC Threshold>

<

K801,





<

K802,





<

K810,

output on,output state,pulse width,output mode>

<

K811,


<

K812,


<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,

match length,wild card,sequence on no read,sequence on mismatch>

<

K224,

number of master symbols>

<

K225,

status>

<

K231,

index,master symbol data>

<

K735,

status,replacement string>

<

K736,


<

K407

> (returns: hours,minutes)

<

K409,

status,service message, threshold,resolution>

<

K412,

user-defined name>

<

K740,

output index,start location,length>

<

K741,

output index,length,hex string>

<

K742,

symbol number,status>

<

K743,

output format status>

<

K744,

filter number,symbology,length,wildcard,placeholder,

data,unused,database index>

<

K745,

number of filters>

A-25

Serial Commands

Serial Command Format

di-soric readers are controlled by two types of serial commands: configuration commands and utility commands.

Rules that apply to both configuration and utility commands

• Less than ‘

<

‘ and greater than ‘

>

’ angle bracket characters enclose the commands.

• Commands and data are case sensitive. Characters must be entered as upper or lower case, as specified.


Serial Utility Commands are sent during operations and are not followed by

<A>

or

<Z>

.

Serial Configuration Commands (K Commands)

di-soric’s serial configuration commands begin with a single “K” character followed by a 3digit numeric character, comma-separated command fields, and an initializing command, as follows:

<

K

numeric character,data,data,...etc.><initializing command>

An initializing command

<Z>

or

<A>

may follow the command.

•

<Z>

initializes the imager’s memory and saves for power-on.

•

<A>

initializes the imager’s memory but does not save for power-on.

For example, to enable UPC and save the change for power-on, send

<K473,1><Z>

.

To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power-on, send

<K100,3><A>

.

Serial Configuration Command Conventions

• All command fields (except the last) must be followed by a comma (without a space).

• NULL cannot be used. The characters

<

,

>

, and

,

hex pairs (see

ASCII Character Entry Modifier

).

can be used, but only if entered as

• All fields preceding a modified field must be included.

• If there is no change in preceding fields, then commas alone can be entered in these fields. For example, if only the last field in the following command is changing,

<K100,4,1,0,0>

can be entered as

<K100,,,,0>

.

• All fields following a modified field can be omitted. For example, to change Baud Rate only, send

<K100,3>

.

A-26


Appendices

Concatenating Configuration Commands

Commands can be concatenated (added together) in a single string. For example,

<K145,1><K220,1><K450,1><A>

enables LRC, sets End of Read Cycle mode to New

Trigger, enables Narrow Quiet Zone, and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power-on.

Serial Command Status Request

To ensure that any command was received and accepted, send the Show Reader Status command:

<?>

.

The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark. For example, send

<K142?>

to request the status of Postamble.

Entering Control Characters in Serial Commands

To enter control characters within a serial command, hold down the Ctrl key while typing the desired character.

Example: To enter a carriage return and line feed (

^M^J

), enter

<K141,1,CNTL-m CNTL-j>


A-27

Serial Commands

Serial Configuration Commands

The following serial commands can be entered through di-soric ID’s Terminal to control ID-

06 functions. Detailed descriptions of command parameters are available in

Parameters

.

Communication

RS-232 A

RS-232 B

RS-422

Ethernet

Ethernet TCP Ports

Search and Configure Mode

RS-232 A Data Type

RS-232 B Data Type

RS-422 Data Type



Preamble

Postamble

Response Timeout

LRC Status

ACK/NAK Options

Polling Mode Options

Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain

Protocol Selection

External Data Routing

Array Communication Modes

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

<

K101,


<

K102,


<

K126,

status,IP address,subnet,gateway,IP address mode>

<

K127,

TCP Port 1,TCP Port 2>

<

K128,

di-soric ID Search and Configure Mode>

<

K130,



<

K131,



<

K132,



<

K133,



<

K134,



<

K141,

status,preamble>

<

K142,

status,postamble>

<

K143,

response timeout>

<

K145,

status>

<

K147,


<

K148,


<

K150

DAISY>

<

K160,

protocol,address,protocol port>

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,echo to

source,output at end of read cycle,output at ETX,output at timeout>

<

K162,

mode,source,daisy chain i.d. status,daisy chain i.d.>

RS-232 A

Baud Rate, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,baud rate

,parity,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

8 = 115.2K

Options:

0 = 600

3 = 4800

1 = 1200

4 = 9600

6 = 38.4K

7 = 57.6K

2 = 2400

5 = 19.2K

8 = 115.2K

A-28


9 = 230K

Parity, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,

parity

,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

0 = None

Options:

0 = None

1 = Even

Stop Bits, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,

stop bits

,data bits>

Default:

0 = One

Options:

0 = One

1 = Two

Data Bits, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K100,

baud rate,parity,stop bits,

data bits

>

Default:

1 = Eight

Options:

0 = Seven

1 = Eight

RS-232 B

Status, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,status

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Odd

Baud Rate, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

status,

baud rate


Default:

8 = 115.2K

Options:

0 = 600

3 = 4800

1 = 1200

4 = 9600

2 = 2400

5 = 19.2K

6 = 38.4K

9 = 230K

7 = 57.6K

8 = 115.2K

Parity, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

status,baud rate,

parity


Default:

0 = None

Options:

0 = None

1 = Even 2 = Odd

Stop Bits, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

status,baud rate,parity,

stop bits

,data bits>

Default:

0 = One

Options:

0 = One

1 = Two

Appendices


A-29

Serial Commands

Data Bits, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K101,

status,baud rate,parity,stop bits,

data bits

>

Default:

1 = Eight

Options:

0 = Seven

1 = Eight

RS-422

Status, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K102,status

,baud rate,parity,stop bits,data bits>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Baud Rate, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K102,

status,

baud rate


Default:

8 = 115.2K

Options:

0 = 600

3 = 4800

1 = 1200

4 = 9600

2 = 2400

5 = 19.2K

6 = 38.4K

9 = 230K

7 = 57.6K

8 = 115.2K

Parity, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K102,

status,baud rate,

parity


Default:

0 = None

Options:

0 = None

1 = Even 2 = Odd

Stop Bits, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K102,

status,baud rate,parity,

stop bits

,data bits>

Default:

0 = One

Options:

0 = One

1 = Two

Data Bits, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K102,

status,baud rate,parity,stop bits,

data bits

>

Default:

1 = Eight

Options:

0 = Seven

1 = Eight

Ethernet

Serial Cmd:

<

K126,status

,IP address,subnet,gateway,IP address mode>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-30


Appendices

IP Address

Serial Cmd:

<

K126,

status,

IP address

,subnet,gateway,IP address mode>

Default:

192.168.0.100

Options:

0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255

Subnet

Serial Cmd:

<

K126,

status,IP address,

subnet

,gateway,IP address mode>

Default:

255.255.0.0

Options:

0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255

Gateway

Serial Cmd:

<

K126,

status,IP address,subnet,

gateway

,IP address mode>

Default:

0.0.0.0

Options:

0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255

IP Address Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K126,

status,IP address,subnet,gateway,

IP address mode

>

Default:

1 = DHCP

Options:

0 = Static

1 = DHCP

Ethernet TCP Ports

TCP Port 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K127,TCP Port 1

,TCP Port 2>

Default:

2001

Options:

1024 – 65535

TCP Port 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K127,

TCP Port 1,

TCP Port 2

>

Default:

2003

Options:

1024 – 65535

RS-232 A Data Type

Symbol Data Output, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K130,symbol data output

,extra symbol information,diagnostic output,

external source processing mode>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


A-31

Serial Commands

Extra Symbol Information, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K130,

symbol data output,

extra symbol information

,diagnostic output,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Diagnostic Output, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K130,

symbol data output,extra symbol information,

diagnostic output

,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

External Source Processing Mode, RS-232 A

Serial Cmd:

<

K130,

symbol data output,extra symbol information,diagnostic output,

external source processing mode

>

Default:

Options:

1 = Command

0 = Disabled

1 = Command

2 = Data

RS-232 B Data Type

Symbol Data Output, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<




Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Extra Symbol Information, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K131,





Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Diagnostic Output, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K131,



,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-32


Appendices

External Source Processing Mode, RS-232 B

Serial Cmd:

<

K131,



>

Default:

Options:

1 = Command

0 = Disabled

1 = Command

2 = Data

RS-422 Data Type

Symbol Data Output, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<




Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Extra Symbol Information, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K132,





Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Diagnostic Output, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K132,



,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

External Source Processing Mode, RS-422

Serial Cmd:

<

K132,



>

Default:

Options:

1 = Command

0 = Disabled

1 = Command

2 = Data


A-33

Serial Commands

Ethernet TCP Port 1 Data Type

Symbol Data Output, Ethernet TCP Port 1

Serial Cmd:

<




Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Extra Symbol Information, Ethernet TCP Port 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K133,





Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Diagnostic Output, Ethernet TCP Port 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K133,



,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

External Source Processing Mode, Ethernet TCP Port 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K133,



>

Default:

Options:

1 = Command

0 = Disabled

1 = Command

2 = Data

Ethernet TCP Port 2 Data Type

Symbol Data Output, Ethernet TCP Port 2

Serial Cmd:

<




Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Extra Symbol Information, Ethernet TCP Port 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K134,





Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-34


Appendices

Diagnostic Output, Ethernet TCP Port 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K134,



,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

External Source Processing Mode, Ethernet TCP Port 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K134,



>

Default:

Options:

1 = Command

0 = Disabled

1 = Command

2 = Data

Preamble

Preamble Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K141,status

,preamble character(s)>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Preamble Characters

Serial Cmd:

<

K141,

status,

preamble character(s)

>

Default:

CR (0x0D)

Options:

1 – 4 ASCII characters

Postamble

Postamble Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K142,status

,postamble character(s)>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Postamble Characters

Serial Cmd:

<

K142,

status,

postamble character(s)

>

Default:

CR LF (0x0D 0x0A)

Options:

1 – 4 ASCII characters

Response Timeout

Serial Cmd:

<

K143,response timeout

>

Default:

5 (x10 ms = 50)

Options:

0 to 255 (x10 ms)


A-35

Serial Commands

LRC Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K145,status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

ACK/NAK Options

1 = Enabled

Serial Cmd:

<

K147,


RES-NAK Defaults

RES: (Reset)

REQ: (Request)





Polling Mode Options

00 (disabled)

00 (disabled)

00 (disabled)

00 (disabled)

06

15

Serial Cmd:

<

K148,


RES-NAK Defaults

RES: (Reset)

REQ: (Request)





Autoconfiguration Daisy Chain

04

05

02

03

06

15

Serial Cmd:

<

K150DAISY

>

A-36


Appendices

ASCII Character Entry Modifier

Commands that require ASCII text fields, such as Preamble and Postamble commands, can be sent to the imager as hex pairs (see Appendix G,

ASCII Table

, for conversions).

Serial Cmd Format:

<Knnnh,00-FF>

To enter ASCII fields as hex values (00 to FF), add a lower-case h directly after the command’s

K number, and then enter the hex value that corresponds with the desired ASCII character.

Example:

Serial Cmd:

<

K142,

status,

postamble character(s)

>

The ASCII characters

<

,

>

, and

,

can only be entered as hex pairs. So, to make

>

the postamble in the symbol decode output, enter the Postamble command as follows:

<K142h,,3E>

Note that the “status” field contains only a

,

. This is because the only field that is being changed is the “postamble character(s)” field. (See

Serial Configuration Command

Conventions

for a more detailed explanation of this command shortcut.)

Protocol Selection

Protocol

Serial Cmd:

<

K160,protocol

,address,protocol port>

Options:

0 = Point-to-Point

1 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS

2 = Point-to-Point with XON/XOFF

3 = Point-to-Point with RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF

4 = ACK/NAK

5 = Polling Mode


A-37

Serial Commands

Address

Serial Cmd:

<

K160,

protocol,

address

,protocol port>

Default:

1

Options:

1 – 50

1 = Poll address 0x1C, select address 0x1D

2 = Poll address 0x1E, select address 0x1F

...

50 = Poll address 0x7E, select address 0x7F

Protocol Port

Serial Cmd:

<

K160,

protocol,address,

protocol port

>

Default:

0

Options:

0 – 1

0 = Main RS-232 on ID-06 Connector A

1 = RS-422/485 on ID-06 Connector B

External Data Routing

Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,mode

,destination port,ambles to source,echo to source,output at

end of read cycle,output at ETX,output at timeout>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Transparent

2 = Half Duplex

3 = Full Duplex

4 = Customized

Destination Port

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,

destination port

,ambles to source,echo to source,output at


Default:

Options:

0 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector A

0 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector A

1 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector B


4 = Ethernet TCP Port 1


6 = EtherNet/IP

A-38


Appendices

Ambles to Source

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,destination port,

ambles to source

,echo to source,output at


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Echo to Source

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,

echo to source

,output at


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Output at End of Read Cycle

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,echo to source,

output at end of read cycle

,output at ETX,output at timeout>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Output at ETX

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,echo to source,output at end of read cycle,

output at ETX

,output at timeout>

Default:

Options:

CR (0x0D)

Any 7-bit ASCII character

Output at Timeout

Serial Cmd:

<

K161,

mode,destination port,ambles to source,echo to source,output at end of read cycle,output at ETX,

output at timeout

>

Default:

200 (x10 ms = 2 seconds)


A-39

Serial Commands

Options:

0 – 65535

Array Communication Modes

Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K162,mode

,source,daisy chain i.d. status,daisy chain i.d.>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Daisy Chain

Source

Serial Cmd:

<

K162,

mode,

source

,daisy chain i.d. status,daisy chain i.d.>

Default:

1 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector B

Options:

0 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector A

1 = RS-232 on ID-06 Connector B




Daisy Chain ID Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K162,

mode,source,

daisy chain i.d. status

,daisy chain i.d.>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Daisy Chain ID

Serial Cmd:

<

K162,

mode,source,daisy chain i.d. status,

daisy chain i.d.

>

Default:

1/

Options:

One or two ASCII characters.

A-40


Appendices

Read Cycle

Trigger / Trigger Filter Duration

Serial Trigger Character

External Trigger State

End of Read Cycle

Decodes Before Output

Multisymbol

Serial Trigger Start Character

Serial Trigger Stop Character

Capture Mode

<

K200,

trigger mode,leading edge trigger filter duration,trailing

edge trigger filter duration>

<

<

<

<

<

<

K201,

K202,

K220,

K221,

K222,

K229,

serial trigger character>

external trigger state>

mode,read cycle timeout>

number before output>

number of symbols,multisymbol separator>

start character>

Capture Time

<

K230,

stop character>

<

K241,

mode,number of captures,rapid capture mode>

<

K242,

time before first capture,time between 1-2,time between

2-3,time between 3-4,time between 4-5,time between 5-6,time

between 6-7,time between 7-8>

Store No Read Image

Image Processing Timeout

<

<

K244,

K245,

image storage type,image storage mode>

image processing timeout>

Number of Symbols in Field of View <

K518,

number of symbols in field of view>

Trigger Mode / Filter Duration

Trigger Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,trigger mode

,leading edge trigger filter,trailing edge trigger filter>

Default:

0 = Continuous Read

Options:

0 = Continuous Read

1 = Continuous Read 1 Output

2 = External Level

3 = External Edge

4 = Serial Data

5 = Serial Data and Edge

Leading Edge Trigger Filter

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,

trigger mode,

leading edge trigger filter

,trailing edge trigger filter>

Default:

313

(~10 ms)

Options:

1 to 65535 (x 32.0 μs)

Trailing Edge Trigger Filter

Serial Cmd:

<

K200,

trigger mode,leading edge trigger filter,

trailing edge trigger filter

>

Default:

313

(~10 ms)

Options:

1 to 65535 (x 32.0 μs)


A-41

Serial Commands

Serial Trigger Character (Delimited)

Serial Cmd:

<

K201,serial trigger character

>

Default:

Space (0x20)

Options:


External Trigger State

Serial Cmd:

<

K202,active state

>

Default:

1 = Positive

Options:

0 = Negative


1 = Positive


Serial Cmd:

<

K220,end of read cycle

,read cycle timeout>

Default:

0 = Timeout

Options:

0 = Timeout

1 = New Trigger

2 = Timeout or New Trigger

3 = Last Frame

4 = Last Frame or New Trigger

Read Cycle Timeout

Serial Cmd:

<

K220,

end of read cycle,

read cycle timeout

>

Default:

100 (x10 ms = 1 second)

Options:

1 to 65535

Decodes Before Output

Decodes Before Output

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K221,decodes before output

,mode>

1

1 to 255

Mode

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K221,

decodes before output,

mode

>

0 = Non-Consecutive

0 = Non-Consecutive

1 = Consecutive

Multisymbol


Serial Cmd:

<

K222,number of symbols

,multisymbol separator>

Default:

Options:

1

1 to 100

A-42


Appendices

Multisymbol Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K222,

number of symbols,

multisymbol separator

>

Default:

Options:

, (comma)


Start Trigger Start Character (Non-Delimited)

Serial Cmd:

<

K229,start character

>

Default:

NULL (0x00)

Options:

Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except <, >, XON, and XOFF.

Stop Trigger Stop Character (Non-Delimited)

Serial Cmd:

<

K230,stop character

>

Default:

NULL (0x00)

Options:

Two hex digits representing any ASCII character except <, >, XON, and XOFF.

Processing Timeout

Serial Cmd:

<

K245,processing timeout

>

Default:

200 (0.2 seconds)

Options:

1 to 65535


A-43

Serial Commands


Number of Active Indexes <

K252,

number of active indexes,sort database>

Configuration Database

(Standard ID-06)

<

K255,

index,shutter speed,gain,focal distance,sub-sampling,row pointer,column pointer,row depth,column width,symbol type,morphology operation,morphology

size>

Configuration Database (ID-

06 C-Mount)

Load Current Setting from

Configuration Database

<

K255,

index,shutter speed,gain,unused,sub-sampling,row pointer,column

pointer,unused,column width,unused,unused,unused>

<

K255–,

index>

Request Database Index

Setting

Request All Database

Settings

Database Mode

<

<

<

K255?,

K255?

K256,

> index>

switch mode,frame count/time,image process looping, image dimensions>

Number of Active Indexes

Number of Active Indexes

Serial Cmd:

<

K252,number of active indexes

,number of database cycles>

Default:

0 (Disabled)

Options:

0 to 10

Number of Database Cycles

Serial Cmd:

<

K252,

number of active indexes,

number of database cycles

>

Default:

0 (Disabled)

Options:

0 to 255

A-44


Appendices

Symbologies

Composite

Aztec

Micro QR Code

Postal Symbologies

Code 39

Codabar

Interleaved 2 of 5

UPC/EAN

Code 128 / EAN 128

Code 93

PDF417

Pharmacode

Data Matrix

QR Code

BC412

DataBar Omnidirectional

DataBar Limited

DataBar Expanded

MicroPDF417

<

K453,

symbology status,separator status,separator>

<

K458,

status>

<

K459,

status>

<

K460,

postal type,POSTNET status, PLANET status,USPS4CB

status,POSTNET allow B and B’ fields,Australia Post allow 0 FCC>

<

K470,

status,check character status,check character output status, large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,full ASCII set>

<

K471,

status,start/stop match status,start/stop output status, large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,check character type,check character output status>

<

K472,


symbol length 1,symbol length 2,guard bar,range mode status>

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator

status,separator character,supplementals type,UPC-E as UPC-A>

<

K474,


EAN status,output format,application record separator status, application record separator character,application record brackets,

application record padding>

<

K475,


<

K476,

status,unused,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,unused,codeword collection>

<

K477,

status,fixed bar count status,fixed bar count,minimum bar

count,bar width mode,direction,fixed threshold value,background>

<

K479,

ECC 200 status,ECC 000 status,ECC 050 status,ECC

080 status,ECC 100 status,ECC 140 status,ECC 120 status>

<

K480,

status>

<

K481,

status,check character output,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length>

<

K482,

status>

<

K483,

status>

<

K484,


<

K485,

status,unused,fixed length status,fixed symbol length>

Composite

Symbology Status (Composite)

Serial Cmd:

<

K453,symbology status

,separator status,separator>

Default:

0 = Disabled


A-45

Serial Commands

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled 2 = Required

Separator Status (Composite)

Serial Cmd:

<

K453,

symbology status,

separator status

,separator>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-46


Appendices

Separator (Composite)

Serial Cmd:

<

K453,

symbology status,separator status,

separator

>

Default:

, (comma)

Options:


Code 39

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,status

,check character status,check character output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,full ASCII

set>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Check Character Status (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,

check character status

,check character output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,full ASCII

set>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Check Character Output Status (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check character status,

check character output status

,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,full ASCII

set>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Large Intercharacter Gap (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,


large intercharacter gap

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,full

ASCII set>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check character status,check character output status,large intercharacter gap,

fixed symbol length status

,fixed symbol length,full

ASCII set>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


A-47

Serial Commands

Fixed Symbol Length (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check character status,check character output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,

fixed symbol length

,full

ASCII set>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 128

Full ASCII Set (Code 39)

Serial Cmd:

<

K470,

status,check character status,check character output status,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,

full ASCII set

>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Codabar

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,status

,start/stop match,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check character type,check

character output>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Start/Stop Match (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,

start/stop match

,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check character type,check

character output>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Start/Stop Output (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,

start/stop output

,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check character type,check

character output>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Large Intercharacter Gap (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,start/stop output,

large intercharacter gap

,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check character type,check

character output>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-48


Appendices

Fixed Symbol Length Status (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,


,symbol length,check character type,check character

output>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Symbol Length (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,

symbol length

,check character type,check character

output>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 128

Check Character Type (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,

check character type

,check character

output>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Mod 16

2 = NW7 (Mod 11)

3 = Both Mod 16 and NW7 (Mod 11)

Check Character Output (Codabar)

Serial Cmd:

<

K471,

status,start/stop match,start/stop output,large intercharacter gap,fixed symbol length status,symbol length,check character type,

check character output

>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Interleaved 2 of 5

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,status

,check character status,check character output status,symbol

length #1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode status>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Check Character Status (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,

check character status

,check character output status,symbol


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


A-49

Serial Commands

Check Character Output Status (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,check character status,

check character output status

,symbol


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Symbol Length #1 (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,check character status,check character output,

symbol length

#1

,symbol length #2,guard bar status,range mode status>

Default:

Options:

16

0 to 128

Symbol Length #2 (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,

status,check character status,check character output,symbol length

#1,

symbol length #2

,guard bar status,range mode status>

Default:

Options:

6

0 to 128

Guard Bar Status (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,


#1,symbol length #2,

guard bar status

,range mode status>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Range Mode Status (Interleaved 2 of 5)

Serial Cmd:

<

K472,


#1,symbol length #2,guard bar status,

range mode status

>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

UPC/EAN

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,UPC status

,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,

separator character,supplemental type,format UPC-E as UPC-A>

Default:

Options:

3 = Both Standard and Edge-to-Edge

0 = Disabled

1 = Standard

2 = Edge-to-Edge


A-50


Appendices

EAN Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,

EAN status

,supplementals status,separator status,


Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Supplementals Status (UPC/EAN)

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,

supplementals status

,separator status,


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled 2 = Required

Separator Status (UPC/EAN)

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,

separator status

,


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Separator Character (UPC/EAN)

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status,

separator character

,supplemental type,format UPC-E as UPC-A>

Default:

Options:

, (comma)


Supplemental Type (UPC/EAN)

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status, separator character,

supplemental type

,format UPC-E as UPC-A>

Default:

Options:

0 = Both

0 = Both

1 = 2 characters only 2 = 5 characters only

Format UPC-E as UPC-A (UPC/EAN)

Serial Cmd:

<

K473,

UPC status,EAN status,supplementals status,separator status, separator character,supplemental type,

format UPC-E as UPC-A

>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


A-51

Serial Commands

Code 128/EAN 128

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,status

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:


0 = Disabled

1 = Standard

2 = Edge-to-Edge


Fixed Symbol Length Status (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,


,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,


,EAN 128 status,output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,

separation factor>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 128

EAN 128 Status (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,


EAN 128 status

, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Required

Output Format (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status,

output format

,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Standard

0 = Standard

1 = Application

A-52


Appendices

Application Record Separator Status (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,

application record separator status

,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Application Record Separator Character (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,

application record separator character

,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

, (comma)


Application Record Brackets (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,

application record brackets

,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Application Record Padding (Code 128/EAN 128)

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,

application record padding

,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


A-53

Serial Commands

Separation Factor

Serial Cmd:

<

K474,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,EAN 128 status, output format,application record separator status,application record separator character,application record brackets,application record padding,separation

factor>

Default:

Options:

0 = Normal

0 = Normal

1 = High

2 = Highest

Code 93

Serial Cmd:

<

K475,status

,fixed symbol length status,symbol length>

Default:


Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Standard

2 = Edge-to-Edge


Fixed Symbol Length Status (Code 93)

Serial Cmd:

<

K475,

status,


,symbol length>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Symbol Length (Code 93)

Serial Cmd:

<

K475,


symbol length

>

Default:

10

Options:

1 to 128

PDF417

Serial Cmd:

<

K476,status

,unused,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol

length,unused,decode at end of read cycle>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status (PDF417)

Serial Cmd:

<

K476,

status,unused,


,fixed symbol

length,unused,decode at end of read cycle>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-54


Appendices

Fixed Symbol Length (PDF417)

Serial Cmd:

<

K476,

status,unused,fixed symbol length status,


,unused,decode at end of read cycle>

Default:

Options:

10

1 to 2710

Decode at End of Read Cycle (PDF417)

Serial Cmd:

<

K476,

status,unused,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,unused,

decode at end of read cycle

>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Pharmacode

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,status

,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,minimum

bars,bar width status,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,

status,


,fixed symbol length,minimum


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,



,minimum


Default:

Options:

10

1 to 16

Minimum Bars (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,


minimum bars

,bar width status,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

4

1 to 16


A-55

Serial Commands

Bar Width Status (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,minimum bars,

bar width status

,direction,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

0 = Mixed

0 = Mixed

1 = All Narrow

2 = All Wide

3 = Fixed Threshold

Direction (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,minimum bars,bar width status,

direction

,fixed threshold value>

Default:

Options:

0 = Forward

0 = Forward

1 = Reverse

Fixed Threshold Value (Pharmacode)

Serial Cmd:

<

K477,

status,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length,minimum bars,bar width status,direction,

fixed threshold value

>

Default:

Options:

400

1 to 65535

GS1 DataBar (RSS)

DataBar Omnidirectional (RSS-14)

Serial Cmd:

<

K482,status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

DataBar Limited (RSS Limited)

Serial Cmd:

<

K483,status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

DataBar Expanded (RSS Expanded)

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,status,

fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status (DataBar Expanded)

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,

status,


,fixed symbol length>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-56


Appendices

Fixed Symbol Length (DataBar Expanded)

Serial Cmd:

<

K484,



>

Default:

14

Options:

1 to 74

MicroPDF417

Serial Cmd:

<

K485,status,

unused,fixed symbol length status,fixed symbol length>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length Status (MicroPDF417)

Serial Cmd:

<

K485,

status,


,fixed symbol length>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Fixed Symbol Length (MicroPDF417)

Serial Cmd:

<

K485,



>

Options:

1 to 366


A-57

Serial Commands

Camera Setup

Window of Interest

Focus Distance

Illumination (Standard ID-06 Only)

Camera Settings

Sub-Sampling

Morphological Pre-Processing

Morphological Operations

External Illumination Mode

<

K516,

row pointer,column pointer,row depth,column width>

<

K525,

focal distance,distance units,lens type>

<

K539,

mode,brightness>

<

K541,

shutter speed,gain>

<

K542,

sub-sampling>

<

K550,

status>

<

K551,

unused,operation,size>

<

K553,

mode>

I/O Parameters

Calibration Options (Standard ID-06)

Calibration Options (ID-06 C-Mount)

Serial Verification

Beeper

Quality Output

Symbol Data Output

Read Duration Output

Global Symbol Quality Output

ISO/IEC 16022 Parameters

Data Matrix Grading

No Read Message

Input 1

Frame Information

ISO/IEC 16022 Grade LED Display

Green Flash LED

Status Indicators

EZ Trax Output

Database Identifier Output

EZ Button

EZ Button Modes




<

K529,

gain,shutter speed,focus position,symbol type,window of

interest framing,window of interest margin>

<

K529,

gain,shutter speed,unused,symbol type,unused,unused>

<

K701,

serial command echo status, serial command beep status,


<

K702,

status>

<

K704,

quality output separator, decodes per trigger status>

<

K705,

symbol data output status, when to output symbol data>

<

K706,

status,separator>

<

K708,

quality output separator,output mode>

<

K709,

symbol contrast,print growth,axial non-uniformity,unused

ECC>

<

K710,

percent cell damage,total read time,capture time,locate time,decode time,pixels per element,ECC level,matrix size,quiet

zone,symbol angle>

<

K714,

status,message>

<

K730,

input mode,active state>

<

K734,

output frame number,output coordinates>

<

K737,

unused,LED AIM LED display>

<

K750,

LED status,targeting status,green flash duration>

<

K751,

comm,bar graph,I/O 1,I/O 2>

<

K757,

status,port,image mode,image format,image quality,

object info enable,grade enable>

<

K759,

status,separator character>

<

K770,

global status,default on power-on,load configuration database,

save for power-on>

<

K771,

first beep,second beep,third beep,fourth beep>

<

K780,



<

K781,



<

K782,



A-58


Appendices







<

K790,


<

K791,


<

K792,


<

K800,





<

K801,





<

K802,





<

K810,


<

K811,


<

K812,


Output 1 Parameters

Output 2 Parameters

Output 3 Parameters

Serial Verification

Serial Command Echo Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,serial command echo status

,serial command beep status,


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Serial Command Beep Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,

serial command echo status,

serial command beep status

,


Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Control/Hex Output

Serial Cmd:

<

K701,

serial command echo status,serial command beep status,control/hex

output>

Default:

Options:

0 = Control

0 = Control

1 = Hex

Beeper

Serial Cmd:

<

K702,beeper status

>

Default:

1 = Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Good Read

2 = No Read


A-59

Serial Commands

Quality Output

Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K704,separator

,decodes per trigger status>

Default:

, (comma)

Options:


Decodes per Trigger Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K704,

separator,

decodes per trigger status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


Symbol Data Output Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K705,symbol data output status

,when to output,symbology i.d. output

status>

Default:

Options:

3 = Good Read

0 = Disabled 1 = Match 2 = Mismatch

3 = Good Read


Serial Cmd:

<

K705,

symbol data output status,

when to output

,symbology i.d. output

status>

Default:

Options:

0 = As Soon As Possible

0 = ASAP

1 = End of Read Cycle

Symbology ID Output Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K705,

symbol data output status,when to output,

symbology i.d. output status

>

Default:

Options:

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled (AIM-Defined ID) 2 = Readable ID

Read Duration Output

Read Duration Output Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K706,status

,separator>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Read Duration Output Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K706,

status,

separator

>

Default:

Space (0x20)

Options:


A-60


No Read Message

No Read Message Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K714,No Read message status

,No Read message>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

No Read Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K714,

no read message status,

No Read message

>

Default:

NOREAD

Options:

Any valid ASCII string up to 128 characters

Input 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K730,status

,active state>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Reset Counts

2 = Unlatch Output

Active State

Serial Cmd:

<

K730,

status,

active state

>

Default:

0 = Active Open

Options:

0 = Active Open

1 = Active Closed

Green Flash LED (Standard ID-06 Only)


Serial Cmd:

<

K750,green flash mode

,unused,green flash duration>

Default:

1 = Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Good Read

2 = Static Presentation

3 = Match

4 = Mismatch

5 = Strobe


Serial Cmd:

<

K750,

green flash mode,unused,

green flash duration

>

Default:

100 (1 second)

Options:

0 to 65535 (in 10 ms increments)

Appendices


A-61

Serial Commands

Status Indicators

Serial Cmd:

<

K751,status

,bar graph,I/O 1,I/O 2>

Default:

1 = PHY Activity

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = PHY Activity

2 = Protocol Activity

Bar Graph

Serial Cmd:

<

K751,

status,

bar graph

,I/O 1,I/O 2>

Default:

1 = Read Rate / Good Read

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate / Good Read

2 = Symbol Grade

I/O 1

Serial Cmd:

<

K751,

status,bar graph,

I/O 1

,I/O 2>

Default:

1 = Output Active

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Output Active

2 = Input Active

I/O 2

Serial Cmd:

<

K751,

status,bar graph,I/O 1,

I/O 2

>

Default:

2 = Input Active

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Output Active

2 = Input Active

Database Identifier Output

Serial Cmd:

<

K759,status

,separator>

Default:

0 = Disabed

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Separator

Serial Cmd:

<

K759,

status,

separator

>

Default:

Space (0x20)

Options:


A-62


Appendices

EZ Button

Global Status

Serial Cmd:

<

K770,global status

,default on power-on>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Trigger

3 = Unlatch Outputs

4 = Parameter Switch


Serial Cmd:

<

K770,

global status,

default on power-on

>

Default:

1 = Enabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

EZ Button Modes (Standard ID-06)

Serial Cmd:

<

K771,


Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Single Beep

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Two Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Three Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Four Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

3 = Save for Power-On 3 = Save for Power-On 3 = Save for Power-On

3 = Save for Power-On

4 = Unused 4 = Unused 4 = Unused 4 = Unused

5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master


7 = Target System

8 = Unused

9 = Bar Code Config.

7 = Target System

8 = Unused

7 = Target System

8 = Unused



7 = Target System

8 = Unused



A-63

Serial Commands

EZ Button Modes (ID-06 C-Mount)

Serial Cmd:

<

K771,


Options:

0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled

Single Beep

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Two Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Three Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

Four Beeps

0 = Disabled

1 = Read Rate

2 = Calibrate

3 = Save for Power-On 3 = Save for Power-On 3 = Save for Power-On

3 = Save for Power-On


5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master 5 = Load New Master


7 = Unused

8 = Unused

7 = Unused

8 = Unused



7 = Unused

8 = Unused


7 = Unused

8 = Unused


Trend Analysis Output 1

Trend Analysis Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,trend analysis mode

,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,

decodes per trigger threshold>

Default:

Options:

1 = No Read

0 = Mismatch

1 = No Read

2 = Decodes per Trigger

Trigger Evaluation Period

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,

trigger evaluation period

,number to output on,


Default:

Options:

0

0 to 255

Number to Output On

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,

number to output on

,


Default:

Options:

0

0 to 255

Decodes per Trigger Threshold

Serial Cmd:

<

K780,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on,

decodes per trigger threshold

>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 65535

A-64


Appendices


Serial Cmd:

<

K781,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on>


Serial Cmd:

<

K782,

trend analysis mode,trigger evaluation period,number to output on>

Diagnostics Output 1

Service Unit

Serial Cmd:

<

K790,service unit

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled


Serial Cmd:

<

K791,

service unit>


Serial Cmd:

<

K792,

service unit>


A-65

Serial Commands


Output On

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,output on

,output state,pulse width,output mode>

Default:

Mismatch or No Read

Options:

0 = Mismatch or No Read

1 = Match or Good Read

2 = Mismatch

3 = No Read

4 = Trend Analysis

5 = Validation

6 = Diagnostic Warning

7 = In Read Cycle

8 = Read Cycle Data Valid

Output State

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,

output state

,pulse width,output mode>

Default:

0 = Normally Open

Options:

0 = Normally Open

1 = Normally Closed

Pulse Width

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,output state,

pulse width

,output mode>

Default:

500

Options:

1 to 65535 (in 1 ms increments)

Output Mode

Serial Cmd:

<

K810,

output on,output state,pulse width,

output mode

>

Default:

0 = Pulse

Options:

0 = Pulse

1 = Latch Mode 1 (Unlatch Input 1 Pin)

2 = Latch Mode 2 (Unlatch Opposite Condition)

3 = Latch Mode 3 (Unlatch Re-Enter Read Cycle)


Serial Cmd:

<

K811,



Serial Cmd:

<

K812,


A-66


Appendices

Matchcode

Matchcode

Master Symbol Database Size

New Master Pin

Master Symbol

Match Replace

Mismatch Replace

<

K223,


match length,wild card,sequence on no read,sequence on mismatch>

<

K224,

number of master symbols>

<

K225,

status>

<

K231,

index,master symbol data>

<

K735,


<

K736,


Matchcode Type

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,matchcode type

,sequential matching,match start position, match length,wild card character,sequence on No Read,sequence on

mismatch>

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

2 = Wild Card

3 = Sequential

Sequential Matching

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,

matchcode type,

sequential matching

,match start position,match

length,wild card character,sequence on No Read,sequence on mismatch>

0 = Increment

0 = Increment

1 = Decrement

Match Start Position

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching, match length,wild card character,sequence on No Read,sequence on

mismatch>

0

0 to 3000

match start position

,

Match Length

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,


match length

,wild card character,sequence on No Read,sequence on mismatch>

1

1 to 3000


A-67

Serial Commands

Wild Card Character

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,match length,

wild card character

,sequence on No Read,sequence on mismatch>

* (asterisk)


Sequence on No Read

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,match length,wild card character,

sequence on No Read

,sequence on mismatch>

1 = Enabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Sequence on Mismatch

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K223,

matchcode type,sequential matching,match start position,match length,wild card character,sequence on No Read,

sequence on mismatch

>

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Master Symbol Database Size

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

New Master Pin

<

K224,number of master symbols

>

1

1 to 10

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

Master Symbol

<

K225,status

>

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

Index

Serial Cmd:

Options:

1 = Enabled

<

K231,index

,master symbol data>

1 to 32768

Master Symbol Data

Serial Cmd:

Options:

<

K231,

index,

master symbol data

Any valid ASCII string

>

Match Replace

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K735,status

,replacement string>

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

A-68



Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K735,

MATCH

status,

replacement string

>


Mismatch Replace

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K736,status

0 = Disabled

0 = Disabled


,replacement string>

1 = Enabled

Serial Cmd:

Default:

Options:

<

K736,

status,

replacement string

>

MISMATCH


Appendices


A-69

Serial Commands

Diagnostics

Hours Since Reset (Read-only)

Service Message

User-Defined Name

<

K407

> (returns: hours,minutes)

<

K409,

status,service message, threshold,resolution>

<

K412,

user-defined name>

Hours Since Reset (Read-only)

Hours

Serial Cmd:

<

K407,hours

,minutes>

16-bit counter (0 to 65535)

Minutes

Serial Cmd:

<

K407,

hours,

minutes

>

16-bit counter (0 to 60)

Service Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,status,

service message,threshold,resolution>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Service Message

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,

service message

,threshold,resolution>

Default:

SERVICE

Options:


Threshold

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,service message,

threshold

,resolution>

Default:

300 (5 minutes)

Options:

1 to 65535

Resolution

Serial Cmd:

<

K409,

status,service message,threshold,

resolution

>

Default:

0 = Seconds

Options:

0 = Seconds

1 = Minutes

User-Defined Name

Serial Cmd:

<

K412,user-defined name

>

Default:

ID-06

Options:


A-70


Appendices

Output Format

Format Extract

Format Insert

Format Assign

Output Format Status

Output Filter Configuration

Output Filter Enable

<

K740,

output index,start location,length>

<

K741,

output index,length,hex string>

<

K742,

symbol number,status>

<

K743,

output format status>

<

K744,

filter number,symbology,length,wildcard,placeholder,

data,unused,database index>

<

K745,

number of filters>

Format Extract

Output Index

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,output index

,start location,length>

Options:

1 to 100

Start Location

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,

output index,

start location

,length>

Default:

Options:

0

1 to n (maximum number of characters in the symbol data).

Length

Serial Cmd:

<

K740,

output index,start location,

length

>

Default:

Options:

0 (Disabled; end of format cell array)

1 to n (maximum number of characters in the symbol data).

Format Insert

Output Index

Output Index refers to the database entry to be modified with this command. A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol’s original data output and/or inserting user-defined characters.

It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output.

Starting with index # 1, enter either an extract or insert command to begin building the required output string. Then, with the next index number, enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string. Continue this process until the string is complete.

Serial Cmd: <

K741,

output index

,length,hex string>

Options:

1 to 100


A-71

Serial Commands

Length

Specifies the length of the user-defined character string that will be inserted. This function is limited to 4 characters per output index, so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences.

For example, to insert a 10-character sequence in user-defined output, three commands with consecutive index numbers would be required, where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2.

Serial Cmd: <

K741,

output index,

length

,hex string>

Default:

0 (Disabled; end of format cell array)

Options:

1 to 4

Hex String

Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry. Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user-defined output string. These two characters comprise the hex (base 16) value of the

ASCII character.

For example, to enter the three-character sequence “Hi!”, 3 would indicate the length of the string, and a hex sequence of 486921 would be the ASCII sequence to be inserted.

(48 = H; 69 = i; 21 = !)

Important: Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character. Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF. Since there is a limit of 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry, there is a limit of 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry.

Serial Cmd: <

K741,

output index,length,

hex string

>

Default:

Options:

NULL (0x00)

00 to FF (As many as 4 bytes, or hex pairs.)

A-72


Appendices

Format Assign

Symbol Number

Serial Cmd: <

K742

,

symbol number

,status>

Options:

1 to 10

1 = Formatted output status for symbol # 1.


...

...


Status

Serial Cmd: <

K742

, symbol number,

status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled (Assign parameters to specified symbol.)

Output Format Status

Serial Cmd: <

K743, output format status

>

Default:

0 = Disabled

Options:

0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Output Filter Configuration

Filter Number

Serial Cmd: <

K744, filter number

,symbology type,length,wildcard,placeholder,data, decode direction,database index>

Options:

1 to 10


A-73

Serial Commands

Symbology Type

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,

symbology type

,length,wildcard,placeholder,data, decode direction,database index>

Default:

0

Options:

0 = Any type

1 = Interleaved 2 of 5

2 = Code 39

3 = Code 128

4 = Codabar

5 = UPC

6 = PDF417

7 = EAN 128

8 = Code 93

9 = Pharmacode

10 = GS1 DataBar

11 = MicroPDF417

12 = Composite

13 = BC412

14 = Data Matrix

15 = QR Code

Length

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,

length

,wildcard,placeholder,data, decode direction,database index>

Default:

Options:

0

0 to 128

Wildcard

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,length,

wildcard

,placeholder,data, decode direction,database index>

Default:

*

= (0x2A)

Options:

Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters

Placeholder

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,length,wildcard,

placeholder

,data, decode direction,database index>

Default:

Options:

? = (0x3F)


A-74


Appendices

Data

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,length,wildcard,placeholder,

data

, decode direction,database index>

Default:

NULL (0x00)

Options:


Decode Direction

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,length,wildcard,placeholder,data,

decode direction

,database index>

Default:

Options:

0 = Any Direction

0 = Any Direction

1 = Forward

2 = Reverse

Database Index

Serial Cmd: <

K744,

filter number,symbology type,length,wildcard,placeholder,data, decode direction,

database index

>

Default:

Options:

0

(any index)

0 to 10

Output Filter Enable

Serial Cmd: <

K745,number of filters

>

Default:

0

Options:

0 to 10


A-75

Serial Commands

Serial Utility Commands

Type


Calibration

Counters


Device Control


<

Zrd

>

<

Zrc

>

<

L1

>

<

L2

>

<

L3

>



<

H

>

<

#

>

<

#a

>

<

#b

>

<

#d

>

<

#k

>

<

#s

>

<

#.

>

<

#a.

>

<

#b.

>

<

#d.

>

<

#k.

>

<

!

>

Command

<

BCCFG

>

<

@CAL

>

<

@OPTIC

>

<

N

>

<

O

>

<

T

>



<

V

>

<

W

>

<

X

>

<

Y

>

<

A

>

<

Ard

>

<

Arp

>

<

Arc

>

<

Z

>

<

Zc

>

A-76

Name

Enter Bar Code Configuration

Calibrate

Initiate Lens Calibration (Standard ID-06 only)

No Read Counter

No Read Counter Reset

Trigger Counter

Trigger Counter Reset

Good Read/Match Counter

Good Read/Match Counter Reset

Mismatch Counter

Mismatch Counter Reset

Software Reset – Retain Current Parameters

Software Reset – Recall Factory Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Power-On Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Customer Defaults

Software Reset – Save Current Settings for Power-On

Software Reset – Save Current Settings as Customer

Defaults

Software Reset – Recall Factory Defaults and Save for Power-On

Software Reset – Recall Customer Defaults and

Save for Power-On




Disable Imager

Enable Imager

Display All Part Numbers

Display Application Code Part Number

Display Boot Code Part Number

Display DSP Code Part Number

Display Kernel Code Part Number

Display SafeMode Part Number

Display All Firmware Build Numbers

Display Application Code Build Number

Display Boot Code Build Number

Display DSP Code Build Number

Display Kernel Code Build Number

Display All Available Firmware Checksums



Imager Status

Learn

Master Database

Read Rate

Reboot System


Targeting

Y-Modem Transfer

Options

Appendices

<

!a

>

<

!d

>

<

rb,

key>

<

?

>

<

K?

>

<

K??

>

<

K?#

>

<

Knnn?

>

<

Knnn??

>

<

Knnn?#

>

<

Knnnd

>

<

LEARN

>

<

UNLEARN

>

<

LEARN?

>

<

G

>

<

Gn

>

<

NEWM

>

<

C

>

<

Cp

>

<

J

>

<

reboot

>

<

VAL

>

<

l1

>

<

l0

>

<

uy,

path and image file name>

<

dy,

key>

Display Application Code Code Checksum

Display DSP Code Checksum

Roll Back Application Code

Imager Status Request

All Status Request

All Descriptor Request

All Range Request

Single Status Request

Single Descriptor Request

Single Range Request

Single Command Default

Initiate Learn Operation

Initiate Unlearn Operation

Display Learn Status

Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index 1

Store Next Decoded Symbol to Database Index n

New Master Load Status

Enter Decodes/Second Test

Enter Decode Percent Test

Exit Decodes/Second and Decode Percent Tests

Cold Boot System from Boot Code

Perform Static Validation of Data Matrix Symbol

Activate Targeting System (Standard ID-06 only)

De-activate Targeting System (Standard ID-06 only)

Y-Modem Upload

Y-Modem Download (Code)


A-77

Protocol Commands

Appendix F — Protocol Commands

Communication Protocol Command Table

Protocol Command

(Mnemonic displayed on menu)

RES

REQ

EOT

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

XON

XOFF

Û

^Q

^S

^D

^B

^C

^F

Control Characters

(Entered in menu or serial command)

^D

Ê

Hex

Value

15

11

13

04

05

04

02

03

06

Effect of Command

Reset

Request

Reset

Start of Text

End of Text

Acknowledge

Negative Acknowledge

Begin Transmission

Stop Transmission

A-78


ACK/NAK Data Flow Examples

Setup 1

RES

REQ

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x06

0x15 disabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

<K141,0>

‘ACK’

Transfer 2

HOST_TX imager_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX

<K141?>

‘ACK’

<K141,0>

‘ACK’

Error Condition

Transfer 1

imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX symbol data

‘NAK’ (host rejects) symbol data (resend data)

‘ACK’ (transaction complete)

Transfer 2

HOST_TX imager_TX

<K141?>

‘ACK’ imager_TX <K141,0> timeout reached...

timeout reached...

timeout reached...

Timeout Reached transaction aborted, data is flushed


Appendices

A-79

Protocol Commands

Setup 2

RES

REQ

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x06

0x15 enabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

<K141,0>a

‘ACK’

Transfer 2


HOST_TX

<K141?>B

‘ACK’

<K141,0>a

‘ACK’


Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

<k141,0>x (BAD LRC)

‘NAK’

<K141,0>a (GOOD LRC)

‘ACK’

A-80


Setup 3

RES

REQ

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x00 (disabled)

0x00 (disabled)

0x28 ‘(‘

0x29 ‘)’

0x06

0x15 enabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

Transfer 2


HOST_TX

(<K141,0>)H

‘ACK’

(<K141?>)k

‘ACK’

(<K141,^M>)w

‘ACK’

Appendices


A-81

Protocol Commands

Setup 4

RES

REQ

STX

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x21 ‘!’

0x3D ‘=’

0x28 ‘(‘

0x29 ‘)’

0x06

0x15 enabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

(<K141,0>)H

‘ACK’

Transfer 2

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

(<K100?>)n

‘ACK’

‘!’

(<K100,8,0,0,1>)X

‘ACK’

‘!’


Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

(<K141,0>)H

‘ACK’

(<K100?>)n

‘ACK’

HOST_TX imager_TX

‘!’

(<K100,8,0,0,1>)X timeout reached...

imager_TX ‘=’ timeout reached...



imager_TX ‘!’

A-82


Appendices

Polling Mode Data Flow Examples

Setup 1

Address

0x01 (translates to) Poll Req @ ‘0x1C’, Unit Select @ ‘0x1D’

RES

0x04

REQ

STX

0x05

0x02

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x03

0x06

0x15 disabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX

‘RES’ ‘0x1D’ ‘REQ’ (Select Unit 1 to receive data)

‘0x1D’ ‘ACK’ (Unit responds with its address)

‘STX’ <T> ‘ETX’


‘RES’ (Terminate Transfer 2)

Transfer 2

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

‘RES’ ‘0x1C’ ‘REQ’ (Poll Unit 1 for data)

‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’

‘ACK’


Starting with a ‘RES’ ensures a clean transaction, without “leftovers” from the previous transaction.

Error Condition 1

HOST_TX imager_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’

HOST_TX ‘Nothing’ (Host should ‘ACK’ here) timeout reached...

imager_TX ‘REQ’ (Unit requests an ‘ACK’ again) timeout reached...



imager_TX ‘RES’ (Terminate Transfer 1, data is flushed)


A-83

Protocol Commands


HOST_TX imager_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’


imager_TX

HOST_TX

‘REQ’ (Unit requests an ‘ACK’ again)

‘NAK’ (Host rejects data frame)

(Retry Event) imager_TX ‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ (Unit sends again)

HOST_TX imager_TX

‘ACK’ (Host receives data)


The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted.

A-84


Appendices

Setup 2

Address 0x01 (translates to) Poll Req @ ‘0x1C’, Unit Select @ ‘0x1D’

RES

0x04

REQ

STX

0x05

0x02

ETX

ACK

NAK

LRC

0x03

0x06

0x15 enabled

Transfer 1

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX

‘RES’ ‘0x1D’ ‘REQ’ (Select Unit 1 to receive data)


‘STX’ <T> ‘ETX’ ‘LRC’



Transfer 2


HOST_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘LRC’

‘ACK’


Starting with a ‘RES’ ensures a clean transaction, without “leftovers” from the previous transaction.


HOST_TX imager_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘LRC’





imager_TX ‘RES’ (Terminate Transfer 1, data is flushed)


A-85

Protocol Commands


HOST_TX imager_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘LRC’


imager_TX

HOST_TX

‘REQ’ (Unit requests an ‘ACK’ again)

‘NAK’ (Host rejects data frame)

(Retry Event) imager_TX ‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘LRC’ (Unit sends again)

HOST_TX imager_TX




HOST_TX imager_TX

HOST_TX

(Retry Event) imager_TX

HOST_TX imager_TX


‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘BAD LRC’

‘NAK’ (Host rejects bad LRC data)

‘0x1C’ ‘STX’ <T/00000> ‘ETX’ ‘GOOD LRC’ (Unit sends again)


‘RES’ Terminate Transfer 1)

The protocol makes 3 retry attempts before data is flushed and transfer is aborted.

A-86


Appendices

Appendix G — ASCII Table

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

31

19

20

21

22

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

07

08

09

10

03

04

05

06

Dec Hex Mne Ctrl

00 00 NUL ^@

01

02

01

02

SOH

STX

Â

^B

03

04

05

06

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

^C

^D

Ê

^F

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

BEL

BS

HT

LF

VT

FF

CR

SO

^K

^L

^M

^N

^G

^H

Î

^J

0F

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

SI

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

19 EM

1A SUB

1B ESC

1C FS

1D

1E

1F

GS

RS

US

Ô

^P

^Q

^R

^S

^T

Û

^V

ETB ^W

CAN ^X

^Y

^Z

^[

^\

^]

^^

^_

59

60

61

62

55

56

57

58

63

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

Dec Hex

32 20

33

34

21

22

23

24

25

26

2B

2C

2D

2E

27

28

29

2A

3B

3C

3D

3E

37

38

39

3A

3F

33

34

35

36

2F

30

31

32

=

>

;

<

9

:

7

8

?

5

6

3

4

1

2

/

0

-

.

+

,

)

*

(

'

%

&

#

$

Ch

SP

“

!

91

92

93

94

87

88

89

90

95

83

84

85

86

79

80

81

82

75

76

77

78

71

72

73

74

67

68

69

70

Dec Hex

64 40

65

66

41

42

43

44

45

46

4B

4C

4D

4E

47

48

49

4A

5B

5C

5D

5E

57

58

59

5A

5F

53

54

55

56

4F

50

51

52

]

^

\

[

W

X

Y

Z

_

U

V

S

T

O

P

Q

R

K

L

M

N

I

J

G

H

C

D

E

F

Ch

@

A

B

}

~

|

{ y z w x

D u v s t q r o p m n k l j i g h e f c d

Ch

` a b

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

Dec Hex

96 60

97

98

61

62

99

100

101

102

63

64

65

66

6B

6C

6D

6E

67

68

69

6A

7B

7C

7D

7E

77

78

79

7A

7F

73

74

75

76

6F

70

71

72


A-87

Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP

Appendix H — Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP

When using Ethernet to deploy ID-06s in an application, the host computer must be in the same IP range as the devices. Network settings are accessible in Windows from the Control Panel. The steps below show how TCP/IP settings can be configured.

1. From the Windows Start Menu, open Control Panel and double-click Network

Connections.

2. The Network Connections dialog will appear. Double-click the icon for the Local Area

Connection being used in the application.

A-88


Appendices

Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP (cont.)

3. The Local Area Connection Status dialog will appear. To check the host computer’s connection settings, click Details on the Support tab.

To verify connection status:

On the Support tab, click the Details button to bring up a list of Network

Connection Details.

4. A connected ID-06’s default address information can be verified in di-soric ID by clicking the Search button in the Connection Wizard. Compare the imager’s IP address to the host’s IP address to determine whether or not they are in the same subnet range (this can be determined by your I.T. department if you are unsure).


A-89

Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP

Configuring Ethernet TCP/IP (cont.)

5. To change the host computer’s connection settings, click Properties on the General tab.

To change TCP/IP settings:

On the General tab, click the Properties button to bring up a list of items being used by the current connection.

On the Local Area Connection Properties dialog, double-click Internet Protocol (TCP-IP).

6. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog will appear.

Select Use the following IP address to set the IP Address, Subnet, and Gateway.

A-90


Appendices

Appendix I — Using EtherNet/IP

This Appendix describes the di-soric QX Object Model. Throughout this document, this port will referred to as the “EIP”.

Overview

The EIP interface will be identified as a Generic Device (0x00). The interface is designed to support remote serial transmit and receive using explicit unconnected messaging.

Necessary Tools

The following tools are helpful for configuring the EIP:

• EtherNet/IP Messaging Tool – can be a PLC or Software Tool, must be capable of

sending explicit messages and establishing Class 1 connections.

EIPScan

is an example

of such a tool.

• Terminal emulation or serial communication tool that can connect to a TCP socket, such as HyperTerminal.

• di-soric ID – di-soric’s setup program. This tool has the ability to find di-soric products on the network, configure their ip address, then configure all application parameters.

EtherNet/IP Terms of Use

EtherNet/IP Technology is governed by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc

(ODVA). Any person or entity that makes and sells products that implement EtherNet/IP

Technology must agree to the Terms of Usage Agreement issued by ODVA. See

www.odva.org

for details.

Device Type

The EtherNet/IP device type is 0x00, Generic Device.

Vendor ID

di-soric’s Vendor ID is 1095.

Product Code

The Product Code is 6800.

ID-06 EtherNet/IP Object Model

ID-06 uses Class 1 connected messaging to communicate most data in three different io assemblies. The user chooses one of two input assemblies, plus the output assembly, to create a Class 1 connection.

Connection properties supported:

Class: 1

Trigger Mode: Cyclic and Change of State

Cyclic Rate: Greater than 20 ms recommended. 10 ms minimum.

Size: Fixed

Type: Point-to-Point (PLC OUT, O->T), Point-to-Point and Multicast (PLC IN, T->O)

Priority: Low, High, and Scheduled


A-91

Using EtherNet/IP

Data Types

di-soric Data Type

U8

U32

STRING32

AB PLC ODVA CIP EDS

SINT USINT

DINT UDINT

Description

Unsigned, 8 bit

Unsigned, 32 bit

ID-06 Small IN Assembly 0x64, 100 decimal (IN = ID-06 -> PLC)

Field # Data Type

Size (# of Data

Type Elements

Field Name

0

1

2

3

4

U32

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

STRING 32

1

1

1

1

U32 + U8[64]

User-Defined Tag Echo

Echo from asm OUT 0xC6

Command Echo


Output Control Echo


Read Cycle Sequence Counter:

When this value changes, it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed.

0 = Read cycle report has been “reset” to

“empty”.

Read cycle report data is only valid when

Sequence is not 0.

Read Cycle Report: Decoded Data

Up to 64, 8-bit chars

The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8[64] field.

Total=

84 U8, or 21 U32

This is a small, lightweight input assembly. It is a subset of the “Big IN Assembly 0x65”. It provides feedback of the output assembly, and the text of any bar codes decoded by the reader.

See Big IN Assembly 0x65 for a description of the data fields.

A-92


ID-06 Big IN Assembly 0x65, 101 decimal (IN = ID-06 -> PLC)

Appendices


Size (# of Data

Type Elements

Field Name

0

1

2

3

4

5

U32

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

1

1

1

1

1

1

User-Defined Tag Echo


Command Echo


Output Control Echo


External Input Status (Physical Pin State)

External Output Status (Physical Pin State)

Device Status

6

7

8

9

10

11

U32

U32

U32

U32

U32

STRING 32

1

1

1

1

1

U32 + U8[128]

Read Cycle Sequence Counter:

When this value changes, it indicates the following read cycle report fields have changed.

0 = Read cycle report has been “reset” to

“empty”.

Read cycle report data is only valid when

Sequence is not 0.

Read cycle report: Trigger count <T>

Read cycle report: Decode/Match count <V>

Read cycle report: Mismatch count <X>

Read cycle report: Noread count <N>

Read cycle report: Decoded Data

Up to 128, 8-bit chars

The first U32 is the length of the bar code data in the U8[128] field.

Total=

176 U8, or 44 U32

This contains more status information, and a longer bar code string, than the “Small IN

Assembly 0x64”. This gives the PLC visibility of the device’s discrete io, current operational status, and read cycle counters.


A-93

Using EtherNet/IP

User Defined Tag Echo, Command Echo, Output Control Echo

These are a direct echo of the equivalent fields in the OUT assembly. They provide the

PLC programmer with a method of verifying that the OUT data has been received by ID-06.

External Input Status (Physical Pin State)

Bit # Pin Name

0 Trigger

1 New Master

2-31 Reserved

0 = no current sensed on input

1 = current sensed on input

External Output Status (Physical Pin State)

Bit # Pin Name

0 Out1

1 Out2

2 Out3

3-31 Reserved

0 = output contact is open

1 = output contact is closed

Device Status

Field # Bit Name

0 Reserved

1

New Master

Requested

State

1 = New Master Requested

2-7 Reserved

8 Scanning Disabled 1 = Scanning Disabled

9-15 Reserved

16 In Read Cycle 1 = In Read Cycle

17 Actively Scanning 1 = Active Scanning

A-94


Appendices

Note the following details with “In Read Cycle” and “Actively Scanning” signals:

1. They may be very short-lived. It is possible for the reader to begin and end a read cycle without these signals being seen in active state.

2. They are only valid for normal read cycle operation: continuous, serial, and triggered.

They do not reflect operation during bar code configuration, read rate, auto-calibration, or di-soric ID “Setup” mode.

Read Cycle Sequence Counter

When this value changes, it indicates a new read cycle report is present.

Read cycle report data is only valid when Sequence is not 0.

Read cycle reports are only output during normal read cycles: continuous, serial, and triggered. Read cycle reports are not output during bar code configuration, read rate, auto-calibration, or di-soric IDdi-soric ID “Setup” mode.

Read Cycle Report: Trigger, Decode/Match, Mismatch, No Read Count

These are the historical read cycle result counters. By comparing the values to a previous report, the number of decodes, mismatches and noreads in the current read cycle can be determined.

Read Cycle Report: Decode Data

This string has the same format that would be output a serial port or tcp connection, with one difference: preamble and postamble are not added.

ID-06 OUT Assembly 0xC6, 198 decimal: Command (OUT= PLC -> ID-

06)


Size (# of Data

Type Elements

1

Field Name

User-Defined Tag 0 U32

1

2

U32

(32 bit flags)

U32

(32 bit flags)

1

1

Command

External Output Control

User Defined Tag

This provides the PLC programmer a method of uniquely identifying multiple readers in the system. This field serves no functional purpose in the ID-06. The value sent by the PLC for this field is echoed back to the input assemblies.


A-95

Using EtherNet/IP

Command

Bit # Action

0 Trigger

1 New Master

2-7

8 Disable Scanning

9-15 Reserved

16 Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters

17 Unlatch Outputs

18-31 Reserved

The PLC programmer should verify that a Command has been received by ID-06 by observing the equivalent “echo” field in the IN assemblies.

Trigger (0)

Edge event-driven. Takes effect when read mode is Serial, Edge, or Level. A transition from 0 to 1 is a rising edge trigger event. A transition from 1 to 0 is a falling edge trigger event. The following sources all induce trigger events in the reader, including:

• A serial command from a serial com port

• EZ button

• External Trigger input signal on connector A

• Command:Trigger bit in the OUT assembly

If the reader is to be exclusively triggered by the PLC, then all other trigger sources must be kept idle.

New Master (1)

Edge-event driven. A transition from 0 to 1 is a command to the unit similar to sending the

<G> serial command, or activating the New Master input on connector A. When activated, the New Master function instructs the reader to store the next decode in the master symbol database.

Disable Scanning (8)

Operates the same as the <H> and commands. A transition from 0 to 1 is the same as sending an command, which issues a “disable” event. A transition from 1 to 0 is the same thing as sending an <H> command, which issues an “enable” event. Note that the most recent command, either <H> or serial commands or the Camera Action:DisableScanning command will always override the previous “scanning disable” state. To verify scanning status, observe the DeviceStatus field in asm 0x65.

A-96


Appendices

Clear Read Cycle Report and Counters (16)

Trigger, Decode/Match, Mismatch, Noread, Decoded Data string, and Sequence. A transition from 0 to 1 is similar to sending the commands <W><Y><O>, which clear the historical read cycle counters. Also, the Sequence counter and Decoded Data string will go to 0.

Note that if this command is received while a read cycle is active, execution of the command will be delayed until the read cycle has ended, and the read cycle’s information will probably be lost.

Unlatch Outputs (17)

If any outputs are configured for “Unlatch on Input1”, a transition from 0 to 1 will unlatch the output. See configuration commands K810-812. It is not necessary for Input 1 to be enabled.

External Output Control

Bit # Pin Name

0 Out1

1 Out2

2 Out3

3-31 Reserved

0 = open the output contact

1 = close the output contact

Note: Not operational at this time.

ID-06 OUT Assembly 0xC7, 199 decimal: Serial Command (OUT:

PLC -> ID-06)


0 U32

1 U8

Size (# of Data

Type Elements

1

256

Field Name

Length of Command String (Field 1)

Command String

Accessible only by unconnected explicit message.

This assembly enables the PLC to send serial commands to the device, similar to a serial port.

Known Issues and Limitations

1. External Output Control has not been implemented yet.

2. There is currently no way to receive serial command responses back from the ID-06.


A-97

Using EtherNet/IP

Programming Flow Charts

Triggered by PLC, symbol data required, timeout or decode ends read cycle.

Setup:

Read Cycle Trigger Mode = External Edge or External Level.

Symbol Data Output = Enabled globally and for EtherNet/IP.

When to Output = As Soon As Possible.

End of Read Cycle = Timeout.

No Read message = Enabled.

A-98


Appendices

NET and MOD LED Indicators

MOD (Module)

Indicator State

Steady OFF

Steady

GREEN

Steady

RED

Summary

No power

Device operational

Major fault

Flashing

GREEN /

RED

Self-test

Requirement di-soric

Implementation

If no power is supplied to the device, the module status indicator will be steady

OFF.

If the device is operating correctly, the module status indicator will be steady

GREEN

.

If the device has detected a non-recoverable minor fault, the module status indicator will be steady

RED

.

While the device is performing its power-up testing, the module status indicator will be flashing

GREEN / RED

.

Per requirement

Per requirement

Safe Mode: Basic comm. only. Scanning system non-functional.

Per requirement.

NET (Network)

Indicator State

Steady OFF

Flashing

GREEN

No connections

Steady

Flashing

Steady

GREEN

RED

Flashing

RED

RED

GREEN /

Summary

No power, no

IP address

Connected

Connection timeout

Duplicate IP

Self-test

Requirement

If the device does not have an IP address (or is powered off), the network status indicator will be steady OFF.

If the device has no established connections, but has obtained an IP address, the network status indicator will be flashing

GREEN

.

di-soric

Implementation

Per requirement.

Before device has acquired an IP address via DHCP.

Per requirement.

After device has acquired an IP address (static or

DHCP).

If the device has at least one established connection (even to the Message

Router), the network status indicator will be steady

GREEN

.

If one or more of the connections in which the device is the target has timed out, the network status indicator will be flashing

RED

.

If the device has detected that its IP address is already in use, the network status indicator will be steady

RED

.

While the device is performing its power-up testing, the module status indicator will be flashing

GREEN / RED

.

Per requirement.

Per requirement.

Not implemented.

Per requirement.


A-99

Allen-Bradley PLC Setup

Appendix J — Allen-Bradley PLC Setup

Allen-Bradley PLC Setup

This section was created and run on the following Allen Bradley/Rockwell components:

• RSLogix 5000 Version 16

• ControlLogix 5561 processor

• 756-ENBT/A EtherNet/IP interface card, firmware version 4.003 or newer.

This setup procedure was also followed in RSLogix with a CompactLogix 5332E as the processor, though the final program was not tested with a CompactLogix processor.

1. Create the I/O Configuration for the base system, including the system’s Ethernet interface:

A-100


Appendices

2. Add ID-06 by right-clicking on the Ethernet interface, and select “New Module”:

3. Select “ETHERNET-MODULE Generic Ethernet Module”, and click OK:


A-101


4. Configure the following fields:

“Name” = A useful name to remember the unit

“IP Address” = The IP Address of ID-06

“Comm Format” = “Data – DINT”

“Input” “Assembly Instance” = Choose either 100 (Small) or 101 (Big)

“Input” “Size” = 21 (Small), or 44 (Big)

“Output” “Assembly Instance” = 198

“Output” “Size” = 3

“Configuration” “Assembly Instance” = 1

“Configuration” “Size” = 0 (none)

5. Click OK when done.

Example: For Small IN (Instance 100, Size 21):

A-102


Example: For Big IN (Instance 101, Size 44):

Appendices

6. Configure the “Required Packet Interval (RPI)” and click OK. 20 ms or slower is strongly recommended. 10 ms is the minimum allowed by ID-06:


A-103


7. Double-click on the “Controller Tags” item, and verify ID-06’s :I and :O tags appear in the Controller Tags window:

8. Open the “Main Routine”:

A-104


9. Right-click on the top rung and select “Import Rung”:

Appendices

10. Navigate to the “32-000001-xx.L5X” file and click “Import”:


A-105


11. At the “Import Configuration” window, link the first two items to the module name assigned earlier:

12. Link “:I” to the input assembly:

A-106


13. Link “:O” to the output assembly:

Appendices

14. Delete any empty rungs:


A-107


15. Select one CPS instruction per rung, the “_small_pt” on the left, or the “_big_pt” on the right. Keep the one that corresponds to the assembly sizes configured for the module, and delete the other:

A-108


16. In this example, the small assembly set has been kept:

Appendices

In this example, the big assembly set has been kept:

For the remainder of this document, the big assembly set is demonstrated.

The system is now configured enough to test communication with ID-06.


A-109


17. Select the control button next to “Offline”, and select “Download”:

18. Once the program has downloaded, make sure the PLC is in Run Mode:

A-110


Appendices

19. To open the Program Tags, right-click on “Program Tags” and select “Monitor Tags”:

20. Expand the “

ID06_IO_big_pt” so that the .IN and .OUT structures and values are visible:


A-111


21. Change the “.OUT.usertag” to non-zero:

A-112


Appendices

The “.IN.usertag_echo” will change to match the same value as the “.OUT.usertag”:

This confirms that two-way communication with ID-06 is successful. It is left to the programmer to move or modify the CPS instructions in the Main Program according to the application’s requirements.

Operation of the data fields within the assemblies is described in the object model documentation.


A-113


EIPScan Setup

This procedure is for the EIPScan simulation tool published by Pyramid Solutions.

1. Right-click on “EIPScan Test Tool”, select “Add Device”:

2. Set the “IP Address” to match ID-06:

A-114


ID-06 will show up in the main window:

Appendices

3. Right-click on ID-06, select “Add Class1 Connection”:


A-115


4. When the “Add Class1 Connection” dialog pops up, select “Data Size”.

5. Populate “Originator->Target” (OUT) with 12, and “Target->Originator” (Big IN) with 176:

Alternately, “Target->Originator” could be set to 84 for the Small IN assembly.

6. Select “Rate”, and set packet rate to 20 milliseconds in both directions:

A-116


Appendices

7. Select “Destination”.

8. Populate “Originator->Target” (OUT) with 198, and “Target->Originator” (Big IN) 101:

Alternately, “Target->Originator” could be set to 100 for the Small IN assembly.

9. Click OK, and the io data windows will show up in the main area, below ID-06.

10. In the I/O menu, select “Run mode” so that there is a check mark next to it:


A-117


EIPScan begins polling the unit, and displays the content of the IN (blue) and OUT (green) assemblies:

The order of data displayed in each assembly block corresponds to the object model documentation.

For a quick test, we can simulate the PLC setting the “User Tag”, and ID-06 echoing it back.

A-118


11. Click on the first byte (User Tag) in the green area (OUT):

Appendices

12. Change the first byte to non-zero. The first byte (User Tag echo) in the blue area (IN) will change to the same value:


A-119


In fact, all bytes in the green OUT area will be echoed back in the blue IN area, at the same location relative to the beginning of the assemblies. Each byte, and bit, has a unique purpose. Please consult the object model for a description. Note that all data is displayed in little-endian order.

A-120


Appendices

Appendix K — Interface Standards

Interface Standards, established by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), specify such things as the signaling voltage levels, maximum cable lengths, and number of drivers.

In the ID-06, selection of interface is made by pin assignment and, in the case of host communication, by software switching between RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485.

RS-232

RS-232 defines an interface between two devices such as, for example, the imager and host. It differs from the other interfaces by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share a common ground line. Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground, a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists. Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet (19.7m).

Despite being the most limited, this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS-232 equipment.

RS-422/RS-485

RS-422, unlike RS-232, measures signals deferentially; that is, the receiver looks at the potentials between the two receive (or transmit) wires rather than the potential between signal and ground. As a result, cables, if shielded, can be up to 4000 feet (1219m) in length. Like RS-232, RS-422 communication is designed for only two devices on a single line and must have a common ground. It can be used wherever RS-232 is used.

Ethernet TCP/IP and EtherNet/IP

TCP/IP and EtherNet/IP protocols are supported over Ethernet. A 6-byte hardware address is used, which is divided into a 3-byte vendor ID and a 3-byte vendor-defined field. Ethernet-enabled device manufacturers are assigned a unique vendor ID, and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes.


A-121

Glossary of Terms

Appendix L — Glossary of Terms

Aberration — The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point-to-point correspondence between the object and its resulting image. Various types are chromatic, spherical, coma, astigmatism and distortion.

Absorption — The loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy. (–)

Active Illumination — Lighting an area with a light source coordinated with the acquisition of an image. Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples.

ADC — See Analog-to-Digital Converter.

A/D Converter — See Analog-to-Digital Converter.

AGC — See Automatic Gain Control.

Ambient Light — Light which is present in the environment of the imaging front end of a vision system and generated from outside sources. This light, unless used for actual illumination, will be treated as background Noise by the vision system.

Analog — A smooth, continuous voltage or current signal or function whose magnitude

(value) is the information.

Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D Converter or ADC) — A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers (signal) for computer processing.

Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) — An integrated circuit that is customized for a particular kind of use, rather than general use. All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated into one ASIC.

Architecture — The hardware organization of a vision system designed for high speed image analysis.

ASIC — See Application-Specific Integrated Circuit.

Aspect Ratio — The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display. Found by dividing the vertical number of pixels (height) by the horizontal number of pixels (width) leaving it in fractional format.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC) — Adjustment to signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the distance between a reader and symbol.

Auxiliary Port — RS-232 connection to an auxiliary terminal or device for remote viewing.

Blooming — A situation in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel. The pixel overflows and causes the photons to go to adjacent pixels. Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography, except that in digital imaging, the result is a number of vertical and/or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture.

Baud Rate — The number of discrete signal events per second; bits per second.

Capture — The act of acquiring and storing video images in an imager or host computer.

Also, the image captured.

CCD — See Charge-Coupled Device.

A-122


Appendices

Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) — A semiconductor device with an array of light-sensitive elements that converts light images into electrical signals.

Check Character — A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 character that is added to encoded symbol data for additional data integrity.

CMOS — See Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor.

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) — Like CCDs, CMOS imagers include an array of photo-sensitive diodes, one diode within each pixel. Unlike CCDs, however, each pixel in a CMOS imager has its own individual amplifier integrated inside.

Connector — A plug or socket on a device or cable providing in/out connectivity for various circuits and pins.

Concentrator — Intermediary device that relays data from imagers to a host and commands from the host to the imagers or other devices.

Counter — Memory space allocated to keep track of imager events.

DAC — See Digital-to-Analog Converter.

Daisy Chain — Linkage of primary and secondary imagers allowing data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections.

Decode — A Good Read. The successful interpretation and output of the information encoded in a symbol.

Default — Restores ROM or flash settings, initializes serial commands and resets all counters.

Delimited — A delimited command or field is bracketed by predefined characters.

Decode Rate — The number of good reads per second ahieved by an imager.

Darkfield Illumination — Lighting of objects, surfaces, or particles at very shallow or low angles, so that light does not directly enter a reader’s optical hardware.

Depth-of-Field — The in-focus range of an imaging system. Measured from the distance behind an object to the distance in front of the object with all objects appearing in focus.

Diffused Lighting — Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular glints from profiled, highly reflective surfaces.

Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) — A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor.

Digital Imaging — Conversion of an image into pixels by means of an Analog-to-Digital

Converter where the level of each pixel can be stored digitally.

Digital Signal Processor (DSP) — A VLSI chip designed for ultra-high-speed arithmetic processing. Often imbedded in a vision engine.

Discrete I/O — Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur.

Direct Memory Access (DMA) — A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device.

DMA — See Direct Memory Access.

DSP — See Digital Signal Processor.

Dynamic Range — The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images; the amount of usable signal.


A-123

Glossary of Terms

Edge Enhancement — Image processing method to strengthen high-spatial frequencies in the image.

EPROM — See Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory.

Embedded Memory — Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash.

End of Read Cycle — The time or condition at which the imager stops expecting symbol information to decode.

Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (EPROM) — A memory chip that retains data when its power supply is turned off; “non-volatile memory”.

External Edge — Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object (rising edge). The read cycle ends with a good read, a timeout, or a new trigger.

External Level — Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector. The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector’s range.

Falling Edge — A change of state (to inactive) associated with a level trigger.

Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) — A semiconductor device containing programmable interconnects and logic components.

Fill Factor — Percentage of pixel area used for light collection.

Firmware — Software hard-coded in non-volatile memory (ROM), and closely tied to specific pieces of hardware.

Fixed Symbol Length — Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted.

Focal Distance — In camera-based vision, the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed. (In optics, the distance from the lens to the focal plane.)

Focal Plane — Usually found at the image sensor, it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus (–).

Focus — Any given point in an image at which light converges; the focal point.

FPGA — See Field-Programmable Gate Array.

Frame — The total area captured in an image sensor while the video signal is not blanked.

Frame Grabber — A device that interfaces with a camera and, on command, samples the video, converts the sample to a digital value and stores that in a computer's memory.

Front End System — The object, illumination, optics and imager blocks of a vision system.

Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing.

Full Duplex — A communications system in which signals can travel simultaneously between devices.

Gain — The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output, expressed in dB; optimal signal strength.

Good Read — A decode. The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a bar code symbol.

Gradient — The rate of change of pixel intensity (first derivative).

Gray Scale — Variations of values from white, through shades of gray, to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one.

A-124


Appendices

Half Duplex — A communications system in which signals can travel between devices in both directions, but not simultaneously.

Histogram — A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities (gray levels) of pixels in an image. The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval.

Host — A computer, PLC, or other device that is used to execute commands and process data and discrete signals.

Image — Projection of an object or scene onto a plane (i.e. screen or image sensor).

Image Processing (IP) — Transformation of an input image into an output image with desired properties.

Image Resolution — The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image. A higher resolution means that more pixels are available per element of the symbol being read.

Examples: 640 x 480 (VGA); 854 x 480 (WVGA); 1280 x 1024 (SXGA); 2048 x 1536

(QXGA).

Image Sensor — A device that converts a visual image to an electrical signal; a CCD or

CMOS array.

Initialize — Implement serial configuration commands into the imager’s active memory.

Input — A channel or communications line. Decoded data or a discrete signal that is received by a device.

Integration — Exposure of pixels on a CMOS sensor.

IP — See Image Processing.

Ladder Orientation — A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are parallel to the symbol’s direction of travel.

LED — See Light-Emitting Diode.

Light-Emitting Diode (LED) — A semiconductor device that emits light when conducting current.

Lens — A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which either converge or diverge light rays.

Machine Vision — The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for controlling a specific activity.

Multidrop — A communications protocol for networking two or more imagers or other devices with a concentrator (or controller) and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS-485 standard.

Noise — The same as static in a phone line or “snow” in a television picture, noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the imager.

Normally Closed — A discrete output state that is only active when open.

Normally Open — A discrete output state that is only active when closed.

Object Plane — An imaginary plane in the field of view, focused by an imager’s optical system at the corresponding image plane on the sensor.


A-125

Glossary of Terms

Output — A channel or communications line. Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device.

Parity — An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd.

Picket Fence Orientation — A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol’s direction of travel.

Pitch — Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol length on the Substrate.

Pixel — An individual element in a digitized image array; “picture element”.

PLC — See Programmable Logic Controller.

Port — Logical circuit for data entry and exit. (One or more ports may be included within a single connector.)

Processing Time — The time used by a vision system to receive, analyze and interpret image information. Often expressed in “parts per minute”.

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) — An electronic device used in industrial automation environments such as factory assembly lines and automotive manufacturing facilities.

Progressive Scan — A non-interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once.

Protocol — The rules for communication between devices, providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices.

RAM — See Random Access Memory.

Random Access Memory (RAM) — A data storage system used in computers, composed of integrated circuits that allow access to stored data in any sequence without movement of physical parts.

Read Cycle — A programmed period of time or condition during which a reader will accept symbol input.

Read-Only Memory (ROM) — A data storage medium used in computers and other electronics, primarily used to distribute Firmware.

Real-Time Processing — In machine vision, the ability of a system to perform a complete analysis and take action on one part before the next one arrives for inspection.

Region — Area of an image. Also called a region of interest for image processing operations.

ROM — See Read-Only Memory.

Saturation — The degree to which a color is free of white. One of the three properties of color perception, along with hue and value.

Scattering — Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object.

Skew — Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis parallel to the symbol height on the substrate. See the illustration under the definition of Pitch.

Substrate — The surface upon which a linear or 2D symbol is printed, stamped, or etched.

Symbol Transitions — The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol, used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object.

A-126


Appendices

Symbology — A symbol type, such as Code 39 or Code 128, with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information.

Tilt — Rotation of a linear or 2D symbol around an axis perpendicular to the substrate.

See the illustration under the definition of Pitch.

Trigger — A signal, transition, or character string that initiates a read cycle.

Very Large-Scale Integration (VLSI) — The creation of integrated circuits by combining thousands of transistor-based circuits on a single chip.

VLSI — See Very Large-Scale Integration.

Watchdog Timer — A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the imager.


A-127

Glossary of Terms

A-128

Di-soric ID-06 industrial imager User’s Manual

Assistant Bot

ID-06 Industrial Imager

User’s Manual

Disclaimer

Latest Manual Version

Technical Support

Warranty and Terms of Sale

Table of Contents

About the ID-06 Industrial Imager

Imager Communication

Warning and Caution Summary

Warning Label Placement

Statement of Agency Compliance

Statement of RoHS Compliance

1 Quick Start

Step 1 — Check Hardware

Standard ID-06

ID-06 C-Mount

Step 2 — Connect the System

Standard ID-06

RS-232

Ethernet

ID-06 C-Mount

RS-232

Ethernet

Step 3 — Position the Imager

Step 4 — Install di-soric ID

Minimum System Requirements

Step 5 — Select Model

Standard ID-06

ID-06 C-Mount

Step 6 — Connect

Connection Wizard

Step 6 — Connect (cont.)

Ethernet TCP/IP

Step 7 — Locate Symbol

Locate by di-soric ID

Locate by EZ Button

Step 8 — Calibrate

Calibrate by di-soric ID

Calibrate by EZ Button

Calibrate by Serial Command

Step 9 — Test Read Rate

Test Read Rate by di-soric ID

Test Read Rate by EZ Button

Test Read Rate by Serial Command

Step 10 — Configure the Imager

Step 11 — Save Changes

Saving Options

2 Using di-soric ID

EZ Mode

Locate/Calibrate/Learn

Test

App Mode

Menu Toolbar

File

New

Open/Save

Import/Export

Model

Options

Preferences > General Tab

Reload Last File

Show Model Prompt

Show Connect Prompt

Receive After Connect

Skip EZ Mode

Enable ‘Send and Save as Customer Defaults’

Preferences > Terminal Tab

Show Non-Printable Characters

Change Keyboard Macros

Change Font

Change Echo Font

Enable Echo

Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus

Preferences > Bar Code Options Tab

Sizing Information

Preferences > Advanced Tab

Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs